1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
158 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
159 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
160 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
162 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
173 by the \SpecialChar LyX
178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
180 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
181 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
182 Documentation mailing list:
183 \begin_inset CommandInset href
185 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
197 \begin_inset Newline newline
201 \begin_inset Newline newline
205 \begin_inset Note Note
208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
209 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
210 \begin_inset Newline newline
215 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
223 \begin_layout Standard
224 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
225 LatexCommand tableofcontents
232 \begin_layout Chapter
236 \begin_layout Section
237 What is \SpecialChar LyX
241 \begin_layout Standard
243 is a document preparation system.
244 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
245 scripts, publishable books, business
246 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
247 It is unlike most other
248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
255 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
257 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
270 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
273 pt type, left justified, 5
274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
283 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
287 \begin_layout Standard
288 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
293 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
297 \begin_layout Standard
302 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
303 's philosophy: most importantly,
304 the format of all of the manuals.
305 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
306 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
312 manual describes that, too.
315 \begin_layout Section
320 \begin_layout Standard
321 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
322 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
324 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
325 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
329 \begin_layout Standard
330 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
331 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
332 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
334 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
335 only a vertical scrollbar.
336 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
337 The first case is large images.
338 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
339 image and use the option
350 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
353 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
354 this doesn't work for equations yet.
357 \begin_layout Standard
358 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
359 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
367 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
374 \begin_layout Section
378 \begin_layout Standard
379 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
381 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
383 Just select the manual you want to read from the
390 \begin_layout Section
391 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
393 \begin_inset CommandInset label
395 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
402 \begin_layout Standard
403 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
404 can be configured via the menu
406 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
410 \begin_inset Index idx
413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
420 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
422 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
423 packages are available.
424 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
426 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
428 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
429 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
433 \begin_inset space \space{}
436 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
437 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
439 To force \SpecialChar LyX
440 to re-inspect your system, you should use
442 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
446 \begin_inset Index idx
449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
450 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
456 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
457 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
460 \begin_layout Section
463 \begin_inset CommandInset label
465 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
472 \begin_layout Standard
473 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
474 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
475 installed, but you will not be
476 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
477 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
478 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
479 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
480 document can always be output as plain text
484 \begin_layout Standard
485 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
486 or DocBook classes or packages.
487 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
488 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
491 \begin_layout Standard
492 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
493 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
494 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
497 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
505 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
506 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
509 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
513 \begin_inset Index idx
516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
517 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
525 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
532 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
536 \begin_layout Chapter
537 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
541 \begin_layout Section
542 Basic File Operations
543 \begin_inset Index idx
546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
555 \begin_layout Standard
560 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
561 in addition to some more advanced operations:
564 \begin_layout Itemize
586 \begin_layout Itemize
602 arg "buffer-new-template"
608 \begin_layout Itemize
630 \begin_layout Itemize
638 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
642 \begin_layout Itemize
644 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
656 \begin_layout Itemize
668 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
672 \begin_layout Itemize
674 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
682 \begin_layout Itemize
704 \begin_layout Itemize
716 arg "buffer-write-as"
720 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
724 \begin_layout Itemize
726 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
742 \begin_layout Itemize
756 \begin_layout Itemize
770 \begin_layout Standard
771 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
772 a few minor differences.
775 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
786 command lists the available templates.
787 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
788 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
789 and possibly propose text fragments
791 for the document, features
792 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
795 you would otherwise need to
796 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
798 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
802 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
806 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
814 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
820 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
821 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
825 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
833 \begin_layout Standard
834 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
866 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
867 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
868 is just that — a big, blank space.
876 \begin_layout Standard
897 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
902 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
905 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
923 will reload the document from disk.
924 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
925 and want to restore it to the last save.
934 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
935 them as your changes.
938 \begin_layout Section
939 Basic Editing Features
940 \begin_inset Index idx
943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
950 \begin_inset CommandInset label
952 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
959 \begin_layout Standard
960 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
961 can perform cut and paste operations
962 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
963 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
964 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
965 editing features and how to access
967 We will start with cut and paste.
970 \begin_layout Standard
971 As you might expect, the
975 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
976 various other editing features.
977 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
981 \begin_layout Itemize
987 \begin_inset Index idx
990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1019 \begin_layout Itemize
1025 \begin_inset Index idx
1028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1057 \begin_layout Itemize
1063 \begin_inset Index idx
1066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1091 \begin_layout Itemize
1095 \begin_inset space ~
1101 \begin_layout Itemize
1105 \begin_inset space ~
1111 \begin_layout Itemize
1115 \begin_inset space ~
1119 \begin_inset space ~
1125 \begin_inset Index idx
1128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1137 \begin_inset Index idx
1140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1155 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1165 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1171 \begin_layout Standard
1172 The first three are self-explanatory.
1173 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1174 and other programs by
1195 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1196 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1201 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1202 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1203 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1204 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1205 into individual cells.
1209 \begin_inset space ~
1214 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1215 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1219 \begin_layout Standard
1223 \begin_inset space ~
1228 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1230 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1232 \begin_inset space ~
1239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1245 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1246 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1247 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1253 \begin_inset space \space{}
1256 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1257 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1260 \begin_inset space ~
1263 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1265 \begin_inset space ~
1269 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1273 \begin_inset space ~
1282 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1283 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1285 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1289 \begin_inset space ~
1294 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1295 start a new paragraph.
1296 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1297 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1302 \begin_inset space ~
1305 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1307 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1311 \begin_inset space ~
1319 \begin_inset space ~
1322 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1325 paste from the primary selection.
1326 This is normally the currently selected text.
1329 \begin_layout Standard
1332 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1334 \begin_inset space ~
1338 \begin_inset space ~
1346 \begin_inset space ~
1350 \begin_inset space ~
1356 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1362 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1365 \begin_inset space ~
1374 \begin_inset space ~
1379 button to skip the current word.
1383 \begin_inset space ~
1388 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1392 \begin_inset space ~
1397 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1399 If the toggle is set, searching for
1400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1411 will not match the word
1412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1426 Match whole words only
1428 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1429 to only find complete words, e.
1430 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1459 offers also an advanced
1462 \begin_inset space ~
1466 \begin_inset space ~
1471 feature that is described in section
1472 \begin_inset space ~
1476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1478 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1485 \begin_layout Standard
1486 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1487 \begin_inset space \space{}
1491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1499 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1501 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1506 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1513 \begin_layout Standard
1517 arg "inset-select-all"
1520 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1521 When the cursor is inside an inset
1524 arg "inset-select-all"
1527 selects the content of the inset.
1531 arg "inset-select-all"
1534 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1539 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1542 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1546 \begin_layout Section
1548 \begin_inset Index idx
1551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1558 \begin_inset Index idx
1561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1568 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1570 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1577 \begin_layout Standard
1578 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1580 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1583 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1586 or the toolbar button
1592 to undo some mistake.
1593 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1595 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1598 or the toolbar button
1605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1612 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1613 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1616 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1619 \begin_layout Standard
1620 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1629 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1630 This is a consequence of the 100
1631 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1634 step undo limit mentioned above.
1637 \begin_layout Standard
1646 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1648 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1652 \begin_layout Section
1654 \begin_inset Index idx
1657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1666 \begin_layout Standard
1667 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1670 \begin_layout Enumerate
1675 \begin_layout Itemize
1680 once anywhere in the edit window.
1681 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1685 \begin_layout Enumerate
1690 \begin_layout Itemize
1697 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1700 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1703 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1704 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1707 \begin_layout Itemize
1708 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1711 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1718 \begin_layout Enumerate
1719 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1723 \begin_layout Standard
1724 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1725 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1729 \begin_layout Section
1731 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1733 name "sec:Navigating"
1738 \begin_inset Index idx
1741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1750 \begin_layout Standard
1752 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1755 \begin_layout Itemize
1760 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1761 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1764 \begin_layout Itemize
1765 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1767 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1769 \begin_inset space ~
1774 or by the toolbar button
1777 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1783 \begin_layout Itemize
1784 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1786 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1789 and use the same menu to return to them.
1790 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1793 \begin_layout Standard
1797 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1802 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1803 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1805 \begin_inset space ~
1810 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1811 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1812 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1813 your last editing position.
1816 \begin_layout Standard
1821 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1825 \begin_layout Subsection
1827 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1829 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1834 \begin_inset Index idx
1837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1838 Navigating ! Outline
1844 \begin_inset Index idx
1847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1856 \begin_layout Standard
1857 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1858 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1859 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1861 \begin_inset space ~
1865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1867 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1871 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1872 \begin_inset space ~
1876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1878 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1883 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1887 \begin_layout Standard
1888 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1889 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1890 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1891 dialog and to modify the citation.
1894 \begin_layout Standard
1899 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1900 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1902 Labels and References
1904 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1913 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1916 \begin_layout Standard
1917 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1918 you further to control the display.
1923 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1924 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1930 option keeps it in the current view state.
1931 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1932 \begin_inset space ~
1935 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1939 3, the subsections of sections
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1943 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1948 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1949 \begin_inset space ~
1953 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1963 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1966 \begin_layout Standard
1973 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1974 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1988 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1989 So, for example, you can move section
1990 \begin_inset space ~
1994 \begin_inset space ~
1997 2.4 or after section
1998 \begin_inset space ~
2003 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2016 (or the corresponding key bindings
2024 ) you can change the level of sections.
2025 So you can for example make section
2026 \begin_inset space ~
2030 \begin_inset space ~
2034 \begin_inset space ~
2040 \begin_layout Standard
2041 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2042 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2045 \begin_layout Subsection
2046 Horizontal Scrolling
2047 \begin_inset Index idx
2050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2051 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2059 \begin_layout Standard
2061 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
2063 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2067 \begin_inset space \space{}
2071 \begin_inset space ~
2074 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
2075 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
2076 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2080 \begin_layout Standard
2081 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2085 \begin_layout Itemize
2087 is used on a small tablet computer
2090 \begin_layout Itemize
2091 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2103 \begin_inset space ~
2116 \begin_layout Itemize
2117 Math constructs with long command names
2120 \begin_layout Standard
2121 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2122 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2124 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2125 windows so that table
2126 \begin_inset space ~
2130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2132 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2137 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2139 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2140 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2143 \begin_layout Standard
2144 \begin_inset Float table
2151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2152 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2155 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2157 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2161 Horizontal scrolling test.
2169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2171 \begin_inset Tabular
2172 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2173 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2174 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2175 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2176 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2218 \begin_layout Section
2219 Input/Word Completion
2220 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2222 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2227 \begin_inset Index idx
2230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2237 \begin_inset Index idx
2240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2271 \begin_layout Standard
2273 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2275 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2276 is used to propose completions.
2279 \begin_layout Standard
2280 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2283 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2288 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2295 \begin_inset space ~
2299 \begin_inset space ~
2304 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2308 \begin_inset space ~
2313 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2314 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2318 \begin_inset space ~
2324 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2325 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2326 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2327 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2330 \begin_layout Standard
2332 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2333 completions available.
2338 key to accept a proposed completion.
2339 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2340 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2341 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2348 \begin_layout Standard
2349 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2350 ing options for text.
2352 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2354 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2356 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2359 he special math option
2363 enables characters to be composed.
2364 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2365 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2368 , you can then input the characters
2369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2380 to a formula to get it.
2381 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2382 of the math toolbar.
2383 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2387 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2388 's installation folder.
2390 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2391 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2398 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2403 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2404 In the example above,
2409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2441 \begin_layout Section
2443 \begin_inset Index idx
2446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2453 \begin_inset Index idx
2456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2485 \begin_inset Index idx
2488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2519 \begin_layout Standard
2520 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2534 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2537 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2541 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2542 \begin_inset space ~
2546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2548 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2555 \begin_layout Standard
2559 \begin_inset space ~
2567 \begin_inset space ~
2588 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2592 \begin_layout Labeling
2593 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2597 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2598 LatexCommand nomenclature
2600 description "Tabulator key"
2607 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2609 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2610 \begin_inset space ~
2614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2616 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2623 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2627 , especially section
2628 \begin_inset space ~
2632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2634 reference "subsec:Lists"
2640 If you are still confused, look in the
2645 \begin_inset Newline newline
2653 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2654 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2658 \begin_layout Labeling
2659 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2663 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2664 LatexCommand nomenclature
2666 description "Escape key"
2674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2681 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2682 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2685 \begin_layout Labeling
2686 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2692 \begin_inset space ~
2696 \begin_inset space ~
2703 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2704 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2708 \begin_layout Standard
2709 There are three modifier keys:
2712 \begin_layout Labeling
2713 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2731 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2732 LatexCommand nomenclature
2734 description "Control key"
2739 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2740 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2744 \begin_layout Itemize
2753 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2756 \begin_layout Itemize
2765 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2768 \begin_layout Itemize
2777 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2781 \begin_layout Labeling
2782 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2800 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2801 LatexCommand nomenclature
2803 description "Shift key"
2808 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2809 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2812 \begin_layout Labeling
2813 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2831 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2832 LatexCommand nomenclature
2834 description "Alt or Meta key"
2839 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2840 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2841 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2847 \begin_inset Newline newline
2850 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2852 menu accelerator keys
2855 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2856 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2860 \begin_layout Standard
2861 For example, the sequence
2862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2868 \begin_inset space ~
2872 \begin_inset space ~
2878 \begin_inset space ~
2886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2905 \begin_inset space ~
2911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2921 \begin_layout Standard
2926 manual lists all other things bound to the
2934 \begin_layout Standard
2935 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2937 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2938 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2939 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2940 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2941 The \SpecialChar LyX
2942 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2943 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2944 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2946 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2962 followed by a capital
2969 \begin_layout Chapter
2972 \begin_inset Index idx
2975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2985 \begin_layout Section
2987 \begin_inset Index idx
2990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2999 \begin_layout Subsection
3003 \begin_layout Standard
3004 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3005 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3006 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3007 numbering schemes, and so on.
3008 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3009 and format the title of your document differently.
3012 \begin_layout Standard
3017 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3018 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3019 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3020 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3021 picks one for you by default.
3022 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3025 \begin_layout Subsection
3027 \begin_inset Index idx
3030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3037 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3039 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3046 \begin_layout Standard
3047 You can select a class using the
3049 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3050 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3054 \begin_inset Index idx
3057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3064 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3068 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3072 \begin_layout Standard
3073 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3078 \begin_layout Description
3079 Article for basic articles
3082 \begin_layout Description
3083 Report for basic reports
3086 \begin_layout Description
3087 Book for writing a book
3090 \begin_layout Description
3091 Letter for US-style letters
3094 \begin_layout Standard
3095 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3096 only uses if you have installed
3097 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3098 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3099 distributions will include
3101 Here are some of the classes.
3102 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3104 Special Document Classes
3113 \begin_layout Description
3114 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3117 \begin_layout Description
3118 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3122 \begin_layout Description
3123 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3127 \begin_layout Description
3128 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3129 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3130 There are three article layouts available.
3131 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3132 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3133 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3134 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3139 sequential numbering
3140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3143 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3144 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3145 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3146 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3149 \begin_layout Description
3150 Beamer Layout for presentations
3153 \begin_layout Description
3154 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3155 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3156 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3157 with \SpecialChar LyX
3161 \begin_layout Description
3162 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3165 \begin_layout Description
3167 \begin_inset space ~
3170 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3173 \begin_layout Description
3174 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3177 \begin_layout Description
3178 Foils Used to make transparencies
3181 \begin_layout Description
3182 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3183 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3184 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3185 with \SpecialChar LyX
3189 \begin_layout Description
3190 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3191 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3194 \begin_layout Description
3195 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3198 \begin_layout Description
3199 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3202 \begin_layout Description
3203 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3204 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3205 (Is used by this document.)
3208 \begin_layout Description
3209 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3212 \begin_layout Description
3213 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3216 \begin_layout Description
3221 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3222 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3224 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3228 \begin_layout Description
3229 Slides Used to make transparencies
3232 \begin_layout Description
3234 \begin_inset space ~
3237 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3238 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3241 \begin_layout Description
3242 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3245 \begin_layout Standard
3246 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3248 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3250 Special Document Classes
3257 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3258 of the document classes.
3261 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3265 \begin_layout Standard
3266 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3268 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3269 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3271 \begin_inset Index idx
3274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3291 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3292 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3294 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3297 \begin_layout Standard
3300 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3305 , are highly specialized.
3307 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3308 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3309 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3310 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3311 by some document class.
3312 There are just too many of them.
3313 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3316 \begin_layout Standard
3317 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3325 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3326 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3327 document class for a new file.
3329 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3332 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3339 manual for information on how to install them.
3340 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3346 \begin_layout Standard
3347 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3348 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3349 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3350 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3351 class files to be used for dissertation
3352 s submitted to those universities.
3353 The \SpecialChar LyX
3354 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3356 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3360 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3366 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3369 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3371 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3373 name "subsec:Modules"
3378 \begin_inset Index idx
3381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3390 \begin_layout Standard
3391 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3392 chosen document class.
3393 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3394 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3401 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3405 \begin_inset Index idx
3408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3415 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3419 \begin_layout Standard
3420 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3421 packages or file format converters that are not always
3422 installed by default.
3424 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3425 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3426 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3427 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3429 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3430 file without the missing prerequisites.
3431 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3432 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3435 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3439 \begin_inset Index idx
3442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3443 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3449 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3454 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3457 \begin_layout Standard
3458 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3466 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3468 will advise you about these things.
3476 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3480 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3485 \begin_inset Index idx
3488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3489 Document ! Local Layout
3497 \begin_layout Standard
3498 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3499 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3500 : They are intended to be used in
3501 a variety of different documents.
3502 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3503 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3504 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3505 need a specific inset or
3506 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3508 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757388
3511 style only that one time.
3512 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3514 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3532 manual for information on how to use it.
3535 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3539 \begin_layout Standard
3540 Each class has a default set of options.
3541 Here's a quick table describing them:
3544 \begin_layout Standard
3545 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3551 \begin_layout Standard
3553 \begin_inset Tabular
3554 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3555 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3556 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3557 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3558 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3559 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3560 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4014 \begin_layout Standard
4015 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4021 \begin_layout Standard
4022 You're probably also wondering what
4023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4027 \begin_inset space ~
4031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4035 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4036 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4041 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4046 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4056 headings, there are also
4064 headings, and so on.
4065 We will describe these headings fully in section
4066 \begin_inset space ~
4070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4072 reference "subsec:Headings"
4079 \begin_layout Subsection
4081 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4083 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4088 \begin_inset Index idx
4091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4098 \begin_inset Index idx
4101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4110 \begin_layout Standard
4111 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4113 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4120 \begin_inset space ~
4128 \begin_inset space ~
4133 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4135 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4136 doesn't support special options you want to
4137 use for your document.
4138 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4139 -class and its options, you have to read
4143 \begin_layout Standard
4147 \begin_inset space ~
4154 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4160 \begin_inset space ~
4165 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4166 You can choose between the following five options:
4169 \begin_layout Labeling
4170 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4175 Use default page style of current class.
4178 \begin_layout Labeling
4179 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4184 No page numbers or headings.
4187 \begin_layout Labeling
4188 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4196 \begin_layout Labeling
4197 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4202 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4203 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4204 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4205 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4208 \begin_layout Labeling
4209 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4214 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4215 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4221 \begin_inset Index idx
4224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4232 How they are defined is explained in section
4233 \begin_inset space ~
4237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4239 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4246 \begin_layout Standard
4247 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4248 \begin_inset space ~
4252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4254 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4261 \begin_layout Subsection
4262 Paper Size and Orientation
4263 \begin_inset Index idx
4266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4267 Document ! Paper size
4273 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4275 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4282 \begin_layout Standard
4283 You can find the following options in the menu
4286 \begin_inset space ~
4293 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4297 \begin_inset Index idx
4300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4309 \begin_layout Labeling
4310 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4314 \begin_inset space ~
4319 What size paper to print on.
4324 \begin_layout Itemize
4330 \begin_layout Itemize
4336 \begin_layout Itemize
4342 \begin_layout Itemize
4348 \begin_layout Itemize
4351 US letter, US legal, US executive
4354 \begin_layout Itemize
4360 \begin_layout Itemize
4367 \begin_layout Labeling
4368 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4373 To choose whether to output as
4384 \begin_layout Labeling
4385 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4389 \begin_inset space ~
4394 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4395 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4398 \begin_layout Subsection
4400 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4402 name "subsec:Margins"
4407 \begin_inset Index idx
4410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4417 \begin_inset Index idx
4420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4429 \begin_layout Standard
4430 Paper margins are set in the menu
4432 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4436 \begin_inset Index idx
4439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4448 \begin_layout Standard
4449 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4450 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4451 the paper format and the font size into account.
4454 \begin_layout Subsection
4458 \begin_layout Standard
4459 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4465 That includes the paragraph environments.
4466 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4467 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4468 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4470 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4479 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4481 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4482 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4483 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4486 \begin_layout Section
4487 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4488 \begin_inset Index idx
4491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4492 Paragraph ! Indentation
4500 \begin_layout Subsection
4502 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4504 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4511 \begin_layout Standard
4512 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4513 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4516 \begin_layout Standard
4517 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4518 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4519 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4520 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4524 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4530 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4531 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4532 language than English.
4534 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4537 \begin_layout Standard
4538 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4539 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4540 into \SpecialChar LyX
4542 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4545 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4547 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4548 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4549 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4556 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4557 goes to produce a printable file.
4562 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4564 gives you the ability globally to change
4568 these pre-coded spacings.
4569 We will explain more later.
4572 \begin_layout Subsection
4573 Paragraph Separation
4574 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4576 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4581 \begin_inset Index idx
4584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4585 Paragraph ! Separation
4593 \begin_layout Standard
4601 \begin_inset space ~
4609 \begin_inset space ~
4616 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4620 \begin_inset Index idx
4623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4629 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4632 \begin_layout Subsection
4636 \begin_layout Standard
4637 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4640 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4642 \begin_inset space ~
4647 dialog and toggle the
4650 \begin_inset space ~
4655 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4658 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4662 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4663 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4667 \begin_layout Standard
4668 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4669 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4672 \begin_layout Subsection
4674 \begin_inset Index idx
4677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4678 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4686 \begin_layout Standard
4689 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4693 \begin_inset Index idx
4696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4705 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4709 \begin_inset space ~
4718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4719 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4725 \begin_inset Index idx
4728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4735 installed to use this feature.
4740 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4742 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4744 \begin_inset space ~
4749 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4750 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4753 \begin_layout Section
4754 Paragraph Environments
4755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4757 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4762 \begin_inset Index idx
4765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4766 Paragraph ! Environments
4772 \begin_inset Index idx
4775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4776 Paragraph environments|(
4784 \begin_layout Subsection
4788 \begin_layout Standard
4789 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4792 \begin_layout Standard
4801 } \SpecialChar ldots
4811 \begin_inset Newline newline
4814 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4816 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4817 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4818 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4827 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4830 \begin_layout Standard
4831 A paragraph environment is simply a
4832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4839 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4840 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4841 scheme, labels, and so on.
4842 Additionally, you can
4843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4850 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4851 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4852 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4853 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4855 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4857 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4860 \begin_layout Standard
4861 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4862 \begin_inset Graphics
4863 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4869 at the left end of the toolbar.
4871 will change the environment of the
4875 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4876 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4877 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4881 \begin_layout Standard
4890 create a new paragraph using the
4894 paragraph environment.
4896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4903 because if you are in one of these environments:
4906 \begin_layout Itemize
4912 \begin_layout Itemize
4918 \begin_layout Itemize
4924 \begin_layout Itemize
4930 \begin_layout Itemize
4936 \begin_layout Itemize
4942 \begin_layout Itemize
4948 \begin_layout Standard
4950 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4954 , rather than resetting it to
4959 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4960 \begin_inset space ~
4964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4966 reference "sec:Nesting"
4973 \begin_layout Subsection
4977 \begin_layout Standard
4978 The default paragraph environment is
4983 It creates a plain paragraph.
4985 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4986 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4987 this manual) are in the
4994 \begin_layout Standard
4995 You can nest a paragraph using the
4999 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5007 \begin_layout Subsection
5009 \begin_inset Index idx
5012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5021 \begin_layout Standard
5022 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5023 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5032 for thanks or contact information.
5033 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5034 places all of this on a separate page
5035 along with today's date.
5036 For other types of documents, the title
5037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5044 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5048 \begin_layout Standard
5050 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5064 Here's how you use them:
5067 \begin_layout Itemize
5068 Put the title of your document in the
5075 \begin_layout Itemize
5076 Put the author name in the
5083 \begin_layout Itemize
5084 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5085 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5091 Note that using this environment is optional.
5092 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5093 will automatically insert today's date.
5094 If you don't want a date, use the option
5096 Suppress default date on front page
5100 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5101 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5103 \begin_inset space ~
5111 \begin_layout Standard
5112 You can use footnotes to insert
5113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5120 or contact information.
5123 \begin_layout Subsection
5125 \begin_inset Index idx
5128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5135 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5137 name "subsec:Headings"
5144 \begin_layout Standard
5145 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5147 takes care of the numbering for you.
5150 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5152 \begin_inset Index idx
5155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5156 Section headings ! Numbered
5164 \begin_layout Standard
5165 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5169 \begin_layout Enumerate
5175 \begin_layout Enumerate
5181 \begin_layout Enumerate
5187 \begin_layout Enumerate
5193 \begin_layout Enumerate
5199 \begin_layout Enumerate
5205 \begin_layout Enumerate
5211 \begin_layout Standard
5213 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5214 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5215 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5218 \begin_layout Standard
5219 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5220 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5221 You group the book into chapters.
5223 does a similar grouping:
5226 \begin_layout Itemize
5231 is divided into either
5242 \begin_layout Itemize
5254 \begin_layout Itemize
5266 \begin_layout Itemize
5278 \begin_layout Itemize
5290 \begin_layout Itemize
5302 \begin_layout Standard
5303 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5311 Not all document types use the
5315 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5320 is the top-level heading.
5328 \begin_layout Standard
5333 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5334 labels it with its number,
5335 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5337 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5349 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5351 \begin_inset Index idx
5354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5355 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5363 \begin_layout Standard
5364 The unnumbered section headings have a
5365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5372 at the end of their name.
5373 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5374 the table of contents, see section
5375 \begin_inset space ~
5379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5388 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5389 Changing the Numbering
5390 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5392 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5399 \begin_layout Standard
5400 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5401 in the Table of Contents.
5402 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5404 Just as certain classes start with
5418 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5428 This is something you can change.
5431 \begin_layout Standard
5434 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5438 \begin_inset Index idx
5441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5450 \begin_inset space ~
5454 \begin_inset space ~
5459 you will see two counters.
5464 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5465 numbers a section heading.
5466 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5470 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5471 Short Titles of Headings
5472 \begin_inset Index idx
5475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5476 Section headings ! Short titles
5482 \begin_inset Argument 1
5485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5492 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5494 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5501 \begin_layout Standard
5502 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5503 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5504 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5505 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5508 \begin_layout Standard
5510 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5511 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5512 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5513 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5516 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5518 \begin_inset space ~
5524 This will insert a box labeled
5525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5529 \begin_inset space ~
5533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5536 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5537 This also works for captions inside floats.
5538 There can only be one short title per title.
5541 \begin_layout Standard
5542 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5545 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5549 \begin_layout Standard
5550 The following information applies to all section headings:
5553 \begin_layout Itemize
5554 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5557 \begin_layout Itemize
5558 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5561 \begin_layout Itemize
5562 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5565 \begin_layout Itemize
5566 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5569 \begin_layout Subsection
5573 \begin_layout Standard
5575 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5589 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5590 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5591 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5592 the text they contain.
5593 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5601 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5604 \begin_layout Standard
5605 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5614 when you start a new paragraph.
5615 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5619 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5620 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5621 have to change back to the
5625 environment yourself.
5628 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5630 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5637 \begin_inset Index idx
5640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5649 \begin_layout Standard
5650 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5651 time for the differences.
5660 are identical except for one difference:
5664 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5673 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5676 \begin_layout Standard
5677 Here's an example of the
5690 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5692 See – no indentation!
5696 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5697 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5698 the other paragraph.
5701 \begin_layout Standard
5702 Here's another example, this time in the
5709 \begin_layout Quotation
5715 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5716 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5717 the first line, then
5721 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5725 you were quoting other text.
5728 \begin_layout Quotation
5729 Here's a new paragraph.
5730 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5731 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5734 \begin_layout Standard
5735 As the examples show,
5739 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5740 They should put quotes in the
5745 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5749 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5752 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5754 \begin_inset Index idx
5757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5764 \begin_inset Index idx
5767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5774 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5783 \begin_layout Standard
5788 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5794 \begin_inset Newline newline
5797 Which I did not rehearse!
5801 It could be much worse.
5802 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5804 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5805 indented a bit more than the first.
5806 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5812 \begin_inset Newline newline
5815 And make things look fine
5816 \begin_inset Newline newline
5822 arg "newline-insert newline"
5828 \begin_layout Standard
5833 does not indent both margins.
5834 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5835 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5838 arg "newline-insert newline"
5844 \begin_layout Subsection
5846 \begin_inset Index idx
5849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5856 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5865 \begin_layout Standard
5867 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5877 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5878 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5887 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5888 lets you provide your own label.
5889 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5890 describing some general features of all four of them.
5893 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5897 \begin_layout Standard
5898 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5900 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5901 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5910 reset the environment to
5914 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5915 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5916 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5920 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5924 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5931 \begin_layout Standard
5932 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5933 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5934 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5936 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5937 you read all of section
5938 \begin_inset space ~
5942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5944 reference "sec:Nesting"
5951 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5953 \begin_inset Index idx
5956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5963 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5972 \begin_layout Standard
5973 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5977 paragraph environment.
5978 It has the following properties:
5981 \begin_layout Itemize
5982 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5986 \begin_layout Itemize
5988 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5991 \begin_layout Itemize
5992 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5996 \begin_layout Itemize
5997 The items can have any length.
5999 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6000 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6007 \begin_layout Itemize
6012 environment inside another
6016 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6020 \begin_layout Itemize
6021 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6024 \begin_layout Itemize
6026 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6029 \begin_layout Itemize
6031 \begin_inset space ~
6035 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6037 reference "sec:Nesting"
6041 for a full explanation of nesting.
6045 \begin_layout Standard
6046 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6055 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6058 \begin_layout Standard
6059 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6060 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6063 \begin_layout Itemize
6064 The label for the first level
6068 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6072 \begin_layout Itemize
6073 The label for the second level is a dash.
6077 \begin_layout Itemize
6078 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6082 \begin_layout Itemize
6083 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6087 \begin_layout Itemize
6088 Back out to the third level.
6092 \begin_layout Itemize
6093 Back to the second level.
6097 \begin_layout Itemize
6098 Back to the outermost level.
6101 \begin_layout Standard
6102 These are the default labels for an
6107 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6109 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6112 dialog in the submenu
6117 \begin_inset Index idx
6120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6126 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6130 \begin_layout Standard
6131 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6132 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6134 \begin_inset space ~
6138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6140 reference "sec:Nesting"
6147 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6149 \begin_inset Index idx
6152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6159 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6161 name "sec:Enumerate"
6168 \begin_layout Standard
6173 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6174 It has these properties:
6177 \begin_layout Enumerate
6178 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6182 \begin_layout Enumerate
6183 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6187 \begin_layout Enumerate
6189 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6192 \begin_layout Enumerate
6197 environment resets the counter to one.
6200 \begin_layout Enumerate
6213 \begin_layout Enumerate
6214 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6215 Items can have any length.
6218 \begin_layout Enumerate
6219 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6222 \begin_layout Enumerate
6223 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6226 \begin_layout Enumerate
6227 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6231 \begin_layout Standard
6240 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6242 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6243 labels the four different levels in an
6250 \begin_layout Enumerate
6251 The first level of an
6255 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6259 \begin_layout Enumerate
6260 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6264 \begin_layout Enumerate
6265 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6269 \begin_layout Enumerate
6270 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6273 \begin_layout Enumerate
6274 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6279 \begin_layout Enumerate
6280 Back to the third level
6284 \begin_layout Enumerate
6285 Back to the second level.
6289 \begin_layout Enumerate
6290 Back to the outermost level.
6293 \begin_layout Standard
6294 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6298 environment, see section
6299 \begin_inset space ~
6303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6305 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6310 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6314 \begin_layout Standard
6315 There is more to nesting
6319 environments than we've stated here.
6320 You should read section
6321 \begin_inset space ~
6325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6327 reference "sec:Nesting"
6331 to learn more about nesting.
6334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6336 \begin_inset Index idx
6339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6348 \begin_layout Standard
6349 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6353 list has no fixed label.
6354 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6363 of the first line as the label.
6367 \begin_layout Description
6368 Example: This is an example of the
6375 \begin_layout Standard
6377 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6381 \begin_layout Standard
6383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6390 it is meant that the first usage of the
6394 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6396 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6404 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6409 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6410 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6412 \begin_inset space ~
6418 \begin_inset space ~
6422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6424 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6428 for more information.) Here is an example:
6431 \begin_layout Description
6433 \begin_inset space ~
6436 Example: This one shows how to use a
6439 \begin_inset space ~
6451 \begin_layout Description
6452 Usage: You should use the
6456 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6457 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6459 It's not a good idea to use a
6463 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6464 You're better off using
6476 paragraphs into them.
6479 \begin_layout Description
6480 Nesting: You can nest
6484 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6488 \begin_layout Standard
6489 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6490 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6491 them from the first line.
6494 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6496 \begin_inset Index idx
6499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6508 \begin_layout Standard
6513 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6514 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6518 \begin_layout Standard
6527 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6529 Here are its properties:
6532 \begin_layout Labeling
6533 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6535 \begin_inset space ~
6538 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6547 of each line as the item label.
6552 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6553 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6554 space as described above.
6557 \begin_layout Labeling
6558 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6559 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6560 uses different margins for the item label and the
6561 body of the item text.
6562 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6563 label width plus a little extra space.
6567 \begin_layout Labeling
6568 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6570 \begin_inset space ~
6573 width \SpecialChar LyX
6574 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6575 If the label width is larger, the label
6576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6583 into the first line.
6584 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6585 margin of the rest of the item text.
6588 \begin_layout Labeling
6589 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6591 \begin_inset space ~
6594 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6599 environment has the same left margin.
6600 \begin_inset Newline newline
6603 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6606 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6608 \begin_inset space ~
6613 dialog (toolbar button
6616 arg "layout-paragraph"
6623 \begin_inset space ~
6628 determines the default label width.
6629 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6638 multiple times instead.
6639 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6649 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6652 \begin_inset space ~
6657 every time you alter a label in a
6662 \begin_inset Newline newline
6665 The predefined default width is the length of
6666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6674 \begin_inset space ~
6680 \begin_layout Standard
6685 list the same way as the
6689 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6695 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6699 \begin_layout Standard
6704 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6705 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6707 \begin_inset space ~
6711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6713 reference "sec:Nesting"
6717 to learn about nesting.
6720 \begin_layout Standard
6721 There is yet another feature of the
6725 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6726 left-justifies the item labels by
6728 You can use additional
6732 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6733 justifies the item label.
6738 are documented in section
6739 \begin_inset space ~
6743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6745 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6750 Here are some examples:
6753 \begin_layout Labeling
6754 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6755 Left The default for
6762 \begin_layout Labeling
6763 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6764 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6771 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6774 \begin_layout Labeling
6775 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6776 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6780 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6787 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6790 \begin_layout Subsection
6792 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6794 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6799 \begin_inset Index idx
6802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6811 \begin_layout Standard
6812 The features described in this section require that the module
6814 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6816 is loaded in the document settings.
6817 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6823 \begin_inset Index idx
6826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6836 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6837 Custom Enumerate Lists
6838 \begin_inset Index idx
6841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6842 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6850 \begin_layout Standard
6852 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6855 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6858 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6859 There you add the command
6862 \begin_layout Standard
6870 \begin_layout Standard
6882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6883 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6884 Code, look at section
6885 \begin_inset space ~
6889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6891 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6904 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6911 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6912 For capital Roman numerals replace
6924 in the command above.
6925 For Arabic numerals use
6933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6940 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6955 \begin_layout Standard
6957 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6965 You can only number 26
6966 \begin_inset space ~
6969 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6977 \begin_layout Standard
6978 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6979 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6982 \begin_layout Standard
6983 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6986 \begin_layout Enumerate
6987 \begin_inset Argument 1
6990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7016 \begin_layout Enumerate
7017 \begin_inset Argument 1
7020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7043 \begin_layout Enumerate
7048 \begin_layout Enumerate
7049 \begin_inset Argument 1
7052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7076 \begin_layout Enumerate
7077 \begin_inset Argument 1
7080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7106 \begin_layout Standard
7107 For this list these commands were used:
7110 \begin_layout Standard
7121 \begin_inset Newline newline
7129 \begin_inset Newline newline
7137 \begin_inset Newline newline
7147 \begin_layout Standard
7154 makes the label emphasized and
7163 \begin_layout Standard
7164 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7172 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7173 lists until you change the definition.
7181 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7183 \begin_inset Index idx
7186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7187 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7195 \begin_layout Standard
7196 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7199 \begin_layout Enumerate
7200 \begin_inset Argument 1
7203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7222 \begin_inset Note Note
7225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7226 goes back to default numbering
7234 \begin_layout Enumerate
7238 \begin_layout Standard
7242 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7246 \begin_layout Standard
7247 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7252 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7253 to indicate that it is a resumed
7254 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7255 , but in the output.
7258 \begin_layout Standard
7259 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7267 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7276 \begin_layout Standard
7277 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7279 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7280 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7281 of a normal enumeration.
7282 There, insert the command
7285 \begin_layout Standard
7291 \begin_layout Standard
7296 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7300 \begin_layout Enumerate
7304 \begin_layout Enumerate
7308 \begin_layout Standard
7309 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7312 \begin_layout Enumerate
7313 \begin_inset Argument 1
7316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7332 This enumeration starts at 4
7335 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7337 \begin_inset Index idx
7340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7349 \begin_layout Standard
7350 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7352 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7355 \begin_layout Itemize
7359 \begin_layout Itemize
7360 with standard spacing
7363 \begin_layout Standard
7364 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7366 Add there the command
7370 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7373 \begin_layout Itemize
7374 \begin_inset Argument 1
7377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7396 \begin_layout Itemize
7400 \begin_layout Itemize
7404 \begin_layout Standard
7405 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7412 \begin_inset Index idx
7415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7423 For more information see its documentation,
7424 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7434 \begin_layout Standard
7435 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7437 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7438 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7439 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7442 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7445 \begin_layout Enumerate
7446 \begin_inset Argument 1
7449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7457 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7470 \begin_layout Enumerate
7471 with negative indentation
7474 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7475 Further Customization
7476 \begin_inset Index idx
7479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7480 Lists ! Customization
7488 \begin_layout Standard
7489 You can also change the style of description lists.
7493 \begin_layout Standard
7499 \begin_layout Standard
7500 changes the description label font, the command
7503 \begin_layout Standard
7509 \begin_layout Standard
7510 sets the list style.
7513 \begin_layout Standard
7514 An example where the command
7517 \begin_layout Standard
7522 itshape, style=nextline
7525 \begin_layout Standard
7529 \begin_layout Description
7531 \begin_inset space ~
7535 \begin_inset Argument 1
7538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7544 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7546 itshape, style=nextline
7556 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7557 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7561 \begin_layout Description
7563 \begin_inset space ~
7566 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7567 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7568 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7571 \begin_layout Standard
7572 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7578 \begin_inset Index idx
7581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7589 For more information see its documentation
7590 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7600 \begin_layout Subsection
7602 \begin_inset Index idx
7605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7614 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7616 \begin_inset space ~
7619 Address: An Overview
7622 \begin_layout Standard
7623 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7624 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7632 \begin_inset space ~
7638 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7639 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7640 gags on the document.
7641 In contrast, you can use the
7648 \begin_inset space ~
7653 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7654 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7658 \begin_layout Standard
7659 Of course, you're not limited to using
7666 \begin_inset space ~
7675 \begin_inset space ~
7680 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7681 some European academic papers.
7684 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7686 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7688 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7695 \begin_layout Standard
7700 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7701 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7705 \begin_inset space ~
7710 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7711 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7712 Here's an example of each:
7715 \begin_layout Right Address
7717 \begin_inset Newline newline
7721 \begin_inset Newline newline
7725 \begin_inset Newline newline
7728 When is it? What is today?
7731 \begin_layout Standard
7735 \begin_inset space ~
7741 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7743 the largest block of text on a single line.
7744 Here's an example of the
7751 \begin_layout Address
7753 \begin_inset Newline newline
7756 Where do I send this
7757 \begin_inset Newline newline
7760 Your post office and country
7763 \begin_layout Standard
7764 As you can see, both
7771 \begin_inset space ~
7776 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7781 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7782 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7788 This makes sense, since
7796 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7797 Thus, you have to use
7804 arg "newline-insert newline"
7809 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7810 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7812 \begin_inset space ~
7816 \begin_inset space ~
7821 ) to start a new line in an
7828 \begin_inset space ~
7836 \begin_layout Subsection
7840 \begin_layout Standard
7841 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7842 or list of references.
7844 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7847 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7849 \begin_inset Index idx
7852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7861 \begin_layout Standard
7866 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7867 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7868 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7869 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7883 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7884 The book document classes ignores the
7888 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7892 in a letter document class.
7895 \begin_layout Standard
7900 environment does several things for you.
7901 First, it puts the centered label
7902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7910 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7912 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7913 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7914 the subsequent text.
7915 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7917 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7921 \begin_layout Standard
7922 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7926 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7927 The new paragraph will still be in the
7932 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7933 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7936 \begin_layout Standard
7937 \begin_inset Float figure
7944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7946 \begin_inset Graphics
7947 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7955 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7958 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7960 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7981 \begin_layout Standard
7982 We would love to demonstrate the
7986 environment, but since this document is in the
7987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7994 class, we can't do this.
7995 We inserted it therefore as figure
7996 \begin_inset space ~
8000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8002 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8007 If you have never heard of an
8008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8015 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8018 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8020 \begin_inset Index idx
8023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8030 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8032 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8039 \begin_layout Standard
8044 environment is used to list references.
8045 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8046 only use it at the end of the document.
8058 \begin_layout Standard
8059 When you first open a
8063 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8064 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8080 depending on the document class.
8081 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8082 Each paragraph of the
8086 environment is a bibliography entry.
8091 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8092 Each new paragraph is still in the
8099 \begin_layout Standard
8100 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8101 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8103 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8105 handling, have a look at section
8106 \begin_inset space ~
8110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8112 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8119 \begin_layout Subsection
8120 Special Environments
8123 \begin_layout Standard
8125 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8126 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8129 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8134 \begin_inset Index idx
8137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8145 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8147 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8154 \begin_layout Standard
8160 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8162 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8167 key as a fixed whitespace.
8171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8184 \begin_inset space ~
8189 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8207 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8210 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8213 arg "newline-insert newline"
8230 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8231 So, when you finish using the
8236 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8237 Also, you can nest the
8242 environment inside of others.
8245 \begin_layout Standard
8246 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8249 \begin_layout Itemize
8253 arg "newline-insert newline"
8256 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8261 \begin_inset space \space{}
8271 arg "newline-insert newline"
8277 \begin_layout Itemize
8281 arg "newline-insert newline"
8291 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8297 \begin_layout Itemize
8298 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8299 You must put at least one
8303 in any line you want blank.
8304 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8308 \begin_layout Itemize
8309 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8313 since that will insert
8318 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8321 arg "self-insert \""
8327 \begin_layout Standard
8331 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8335 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8339 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8343 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8347 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8348 printf("Hello World!
8353 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8357 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8361 \begin_layout Standard
8362 This is just the standard
8363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8374 \begin_layout Standard
8380 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8382 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8383 as if you used a typewriter.
8384 \begin_inset Index idx
8387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8388 Paragraph environments|)
8393 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8396 Program Code Listings
8401 \begin_inset space ~
8409 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8413 \begin_inset Index idx
8416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8425 \begin_layout Standard
8430 environment is similar to the
8435 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8436 computer console text.
8441 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8455 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8456 you can have empty lines.
8469 \begin_layout Itemize
8470 have a certain language and a text style
8473 \begin_layout Itemize
8474 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8475 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8476 and \SpecialChar TeX
8480 \begin_layout Standard
8481 Because of these properties
8485 works like a typewriter.
8489 \begin_layout Verbatim
8494 \begin_layout Verbatim
8498 The following 2 lines are empty:
8501 \begin_layout Verbatim
8505 \begin_layout Verbatim
8509 \begin_layout Verbatim
8511 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8516 \begin_layout Standard
8521 environment is identical to
8525 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8526 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8533 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8538 \begin_layout Section
8539 Nesting Environments
8540 \begin_inset Index idx
8543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8544 Nesting ! Environments
8550 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8559 \begin_layout Subsection
8563 \begin_layout Standard
8565 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8567 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8569 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8571 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8583 \begin_layout Enumerate
8587 \begin_layout Enumerate
8592 \begin_layout Enumerate
8596 \begin_layout Enumerate
8601 \begin_layout Enumerate
8605 \begin_layout Standard
8606 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8607 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8609 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8611 \begin_inset space ~
8615 \begin_inset space ~
8623 \begin_inset space ~
8627 \begin_inset space ~
8632 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8634 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8637 arg "depth-increment"
8643 arg "depth-decrement"
8657 arg "depth-increment"
8663 arg "depth-decrement"
8667 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8668 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8672 \begin_layout Standard
8673 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8674 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8675 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8676 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8677 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8680 \begin_layout Standard
8681 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8683 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8685 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8688 \begin_layout Subsection
8689 What You Can and Can't Nest
8692 \begin_layout Standard
8693 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8694 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8697 \begin_layout Standard
8698 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8699 than a simple yes or no.
8700 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8703 \begin_layout Itemize
8704 Completely unnestable
8707 \begin_layout Itemize
8708 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8712 \begin_layout Itemize
8713 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8717 \begin_layout Standard
8718 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8719 environments have them:
8722 \begin_layout Description
8723 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8724 Can't nest into them.
8728 \begin_layout Itemize
8734 \begin_layout Itemize
8740 \begin_layout Itemize
8746 \begin_layout Itemize
8752 \begin_layout Itemize
8759 \begin_layout Description
8761 \begin_inset space ~
8764 Nestable You can nest them.
8765 You can nest other things into them.
8769 \begin_layout Itemize
8775 \begin_layout Itemize
8781 \begin_layout Itemize
8787 \begin_layout Itemize
8793 \begin_layout Itemize
8799 \begin_layout Itemize
8805 \begin_layout Itemize
8811 \begin_layout Itemize
8818 \begin_layout Itemize
8824 \begin_layout Itemize
8831 \begin_layout Description
8832 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8833 You can't nest anything into them.
8837 \begin_layout Itemize
8843 \begin_layout Itemize
8849 \begin_layout Itemize
8855 \begin_layout Itemize
8861 \begin_layout Itemize
8867 \begin_layout Itemize
8873 \begin_layout Itemize
8879 \begin_layout Itemize
8885 \begin_layout Itemize
8891 \begin_layout Itemize
8897 \begin_layout Itemize
8903 \begin_layout Itemize
8909 \begin_layout Itemize
8915 \begin_layout Itemize
8919 \begin_inset space ~
8925 \begin_layout Itemize
8932 \begin_layout Standard
8933 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8941 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8951 \begin_inset space ~
8954 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8955 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8956 nested section headings violate this.
8964 \begin_layout Subsection
8965 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8966 \begin_inset Index idx
8969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8970 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8978 \begin_layout Standard
8979 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8980 affected by nesting anyhow.
8984 \begin_layout Itemize
8988 \begin_layout Itemize
8992 \begin_layout Itemize
8996 \begin_layout Standard
8998 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9006 Figures and tables in
9010 are not affected by this.
9015 Have a look at section
9016 \begin_inset space ~
9020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9022 reference "sec:Floats"
9026 for more information about
9033 \begin_layout Standard
9035 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9036 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9040 \begin_layout Standard
9041 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9049 of its own, it behaves just like a
9050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9057 paragraph environment.
9058 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9062 \begin_layout Standard
9063 Here's an example with a table:
9066 \begin_layout Enumerate
9071 \begin_layout Enumerate
9072 This is (a) and it's nested.
9076 \begin_layout Standard
9077 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9083 \begin_layout Standard
9085 \begin_inset Tabular
9086 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9087 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9088 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9089 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9173 \begin_layout Standard
9174 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9181 \begin_layout Enumerate
9183 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9187 \begin_layout Enumerate
9191 \begin_layout Standard
9192 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9195 \begin_layout Enumerate
9200 \begin_layout Enumerate
9201 This is (a) and it's nested.
9205 \begin_layout Standard
9206 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9212 \begin_layout Standard
9214 \begin_inset Tabular
9215 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9216 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9217 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9218 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9302 \begin_layout Standard
9303 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9309 \begin_layout Enumerate
9316 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9319 \begin_layout Enumerate
9323 \begin_layout Standard
9324 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9328 \begin_layout Standard
9329 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9332 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9335 \begin_layout Enumerate
9340 \begin_layout Enumerate
9341 This is (a) and it's nested.
9344 \begin_layout Standard
9345 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9351 \begin_layout Standard
9353 \begin_inset Tabular
9354 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9355 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9356 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9357 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9442 \begin_layout Standard
9443 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9449 \begin_layout Enumerate
9451 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9458 \begin_layout Enumerate
9462 \begin_layout Standard
9463 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9469 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9470 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9474 \begin_layout Subsection
9475 Usage and General Features
9478 \begin_layout Standard
9479 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9480 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9489 is the innermost possible depth.
9490 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9493 \begin_layout Enumerate
9494 level #1 – outermost
9498 \begin_layout Enumerate
9503 \begin_layout Enumerate
9508 \begin_layout Enumerate
9513 \begin_layout Itemize
9518 \begin_layout Itemize
9527 \begin_layout Standard
9528 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9529 both of them in the example.
9530 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9540 For example, if we tried to nest another
9545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9552 , we would get errors.
9555 \begin_layout Subsection
9557 \begin_inset Index idx
9560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9569 \begin_layout Standard
9570 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9571 We have several examples of nested environments.
9572 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9576 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9577 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9580 \begin_layout Labeling
9581 \labelwidthstring MMM
9582 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9591 \begin_layout Labeling
9592 \labelwidthstring MMM
9593 #2-a This is level #2.
9594 We created it by using
9597 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9603 arg "depth-increment"
9610 \begin_layout Labeling
9611 \labelwidthstring MMM
9612 #3-a This is level #3.
9613 This time, we just enter
9620 arg "depth-increment"
9624 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9628 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9634 arg "depth-increment"
9641 \begin_layout Standard
9646 environment, nested inside of
9647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9655 So, it's at level #4.
9656 We did this by entering
9659 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9665 arg "depth-increment"
9668 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9673 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9689 \begin_layout Standard
9694 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9697 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9703 \begin_layout Labeling
9704 \labelwidthstring MMM
9705 #4-a This is level #4.
9709 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9712 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9717 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9721 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9726 keep nesting things inside
9727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9738 \begin_layout Labeling
9739 \labelwidthstring MMM
9740 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9745 \begin_layout Labeling
9746 \labelwidthstring MMM
9747 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9748 and this is level #6.
9749 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9753 \begin_layout Labeling
9754 \labelwidthstring MMM
9755 #5-b Back to level #5.
9759 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9765 arg "depth-decrement"
9772 \begin_layout Labeling
9773 \labelwidthstring MMM
9777 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9783 arg "depth-decrement"
9786 , we're back at level #4.
9790 \begin_layout Labeling
9791 \labelwidthstring MMM
9792 #3-b Back to level #3.
9793 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9797 \begin_layout Labeling
9798 \labelwidthstring MMM
9799 #2-b Back to level #2.
9804 \begin_layout Labeling
9805 \labelwidthstring MMM
9806 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9807 After this sentence, we will enter
9811 and change the paragraph environment back to
9818 \begin_layout Standard
9819 We could have also used the
9835 environment in place of the
9840 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9843 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9844 Example 2: Inheritance
9847 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9848 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9851 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9860 arg "depth-increment"
9864 \begin_inset Newline newline
9867 which, we will change to the
9875 \begin_layout Enumerate
9880 environment, at level #2.
9883 \begin_layout Enumerate
9884 Notice how the nested
9888 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9892 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9896 \begin_layout Standard
9897 We ended this example by entering
9902 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9906 and reset the nesting depth by using
9909 arg "depth-decrement"
9915 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9916 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9925 \begin_inset Argument 1
9928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9929 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9937 \begin_layout Enumerate
9938 This is level #1, in an
9942 paragraph environment.
9943 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9947 \begin_layout Enumerate
9952 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9958 arg "depth-increment"
9962 Now, what happens if we nest an
9966 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9967 label be? An asterisk?
9971 \begin_layout Itemize
9981 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9982 So, its label is a bullet.
9983 (We got here by using
9986 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9992 arg "depth-increment"
9995 , then changing the environment to
10003 \begin_layout Itemize
10004 Here's level #4, produced using
10007 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10013 arg "depth-increment"
10017 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10022 \begin_layout Enumerate
10024 to get to level #5.
10025 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10030 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10034 , because we are in the
10042 environment (that is, it is an
10057 \begin_layout Enumerate
10062 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10063 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10067 \begin_layout Enumerate
10068 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10071 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10074 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10077 \begin_layout Enumerate
10081 arg "depth-decrement"
10084 to decrease the depth after the next
10087 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10094 \begin_layout Enumerate
10096 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10101 \begin_layout Enumerate
10103 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10104 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10108 \begin_layout Enumerate
10109 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10118 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10123 reset the counter for the label.
10127 \begin_layout Enumerate
10131 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10137 arg "depth-decrement"
10140 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10141 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10142 into the twofold-nested
10150 \begin_layout Enumerate
10151 The same thing happens if we do another
10154 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10160 arg "depth-decrement"
10163 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10166 \begin_layout Standard
10167 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10172 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10183 The number of other
10187 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10194 The same rule applies for the
10198 environment, as well.
10201 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10202 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10205 \begin_layout Enumerate
10206 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10207 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10208 the same detail with how we did it.
10217 \begin_layout Standard
10225 arg "depth-increment"
10232 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10233 the example in parentheses someplace.
10234 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10235 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10236 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10240 \begin_layout Enumerate
10245 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10249 \begin_layout Verse
10250 Now we will add verse.
10251 \begin_inset Newline newline
10254 It will get much worse.
10255 \begin_inset Newline newline
10265 arg "depth-increment"
10275 \begin_layout Verse
10276 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10277 \begin_inset Newline newline
10280 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10281 \begin_inset Newline newline
10287 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10295 \begin_layout Verse
10296 Here comes a table:
10300 \begin_layout Standard
10301 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10307 \begin_layout Standard
10309 \begin_inset Tabular
10310 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10311 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10312 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10313 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10398 \begin_layout Verse
10402 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10412 arg "depth-increment"
10418 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10424 \begin_inset Newline newline
10432 arg "depth-decrement"
10439 \begin_layout Enumerate
10444 : level #1) This is another item.
10445 Note that selecting a
10449 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10450 3 times to put the table inside the
10458 \begin_layout Quotation
10459 We're now ending the
10463 list and changing to
10468 We're still at level #1.
10469 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10470 The next set of paragraphs is a
10471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10478 We will nest both the
10485 \begin_inset space ~
10490 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10494 for the letter body.
10498 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10501 to preserve the depth.
10502 Remember that you need to use
10505 arg "newline-insert newline"
10508 to create multiple lines inside the
10515 \begin_inset space ~
10525 \begin_layout Right Address
10527 \begin_inset Newline newline
10530 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10531 \begin_inset Newline newline
10537 \begin_layout Address
10539 \begin_inset space ~
10545 \begin_layout Quotation
10546 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10547 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10550 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10551 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10552 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10553 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10554 as soon as possible.
10555 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10558 \begin_layout Quotation
10559 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10560 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10561 with your order, along with payment.
10564 \begin_layout Quotation
10565 We thank you again for your patience.
10568 \begin_layout Address
10570 \begin_inset Newline newline
10577 \begin_layout Quotation
10578 That ends that example!
10581 \begin_layout Standard
10582 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10583 gives you a lot of power with just
10585 We could have easily nested an
10606 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10609 \begin_layout Subsection
10611 \begin_inset Index idx
10614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10615 Nesting ! Separation
10621 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10623 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10630 \begin_layout Standard
10631 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10633 For example you need two different enumerations:
10636 \begin_layout Enumerate
10641 \begin_layout Enumerate
10646 \begin_layout Enumerate
10650 \begin_layout Standard
10651 \begin_inset Separator plain
10657 \begin_layout Itemize
10663 \begin_layout Standard
10664 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10670 \begin_layout Enumerate
10674 \begin_layout Enumerate
10678 \begin_layout Enumerate
10682 \begin_layout Standard
10683 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10684 list item and use the menu
10686 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10687 Separated <Name> Above
10691 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10692 Separated <Name> Below
10695 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10696 ) and before or behind it the
10698 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10701 \begin_layout Standard
10702 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10703 (red arrow in LyX).
10704 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10705 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10708 \begin_layout Standard
10709 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10712 arg "paragraph-break"
10719 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10722 \begin_layout Section
10723 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10724 \begin_inset Index idx
10727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10736 \begin_layout Standard
10737 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10738 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10740 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10741 be broken at the end of a line.
10742 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10746 \begin_layout Subsection
10748 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10750 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10755 \begin_inset Index idx
10758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10767 \begin_layout Standard
10768 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10769 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10770 ) not to break the line at
10772 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10775 \begin_layout Quote
10776 Further documentation is given in section
10777 \begin_inset Newline newline
10781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10783 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10791 \begin_layout Standard
10792 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10807 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10816 A protected space is set with
10818 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10819 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10821 \begin_inset space ~
10829 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10835 \begin_layout Subsection
10837 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10839 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10844 \begin_inset Index idx
10847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10848 Spacing ! Horizontal
10856 \begin_layout Standard
10857 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10859 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10860 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10864 The length units are listed in Appendix
10865 \begin_inset space ~
10869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10871 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10878 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10882 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10887 \begin_inset Index idx
10890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10891 Spaces ! Inter-word
10899 \begin_layout Standard
10900 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10901 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10902 at the ends of sentences.
10903 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10904 automatically takes care about this.
10905 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10906 followed by a period; see section
10907 \begin_inset space ~
10911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10913 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10918 To insert a normal space, select
10920 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10921 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10923 \begin_inset space ~
10931 arg "space-insert normal"
10937 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10939 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10941 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10946 \begin_inset Index idx
10949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10958 \begin_layout Standard
10960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10967 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10972 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10976 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10977 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10978 inside abbreviations:
10981 \begin_layout Quote
10983 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10987 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10990 \begin_layout Standard
10991 or between values and units.
10992 Compare for example this:
10993 \begin_inset Newline newline
10997 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11001 \begin_inset Newline newline
11004 10 kg (normal space
11007 \begin_layout Standard
11008 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11010 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11011 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11013 \begin_inset space ~
11021 arg "space-insert thin"
11027 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11031 \begin_layout Standard
11032 You can also insert the following space types:
11035 \begin_layout Description
11037 \begin_inset space ~
11041 \begin_inset space ~
11044 space A line with a
11045 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11049 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11053 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11056 negative thin space between the arrows.
11059 \begin_layout Description
11061 \begin_inset space ~
11065 \begin_inset space ~
11068 space A line with a
11069 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11073 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11077 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11080 negative medium space between the arrows.
11083 \begin_layout Description
11085 \begin_inset space ~
11089 \begin_inset space ~
11092 space A line with a
11093 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11097 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11101 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11104 negative thick space between the arrows.
11107 \begin_layout Description
11109 \begin_inset space ~
11113 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11117 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11121 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11125 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11129 \begin_inset space ~
11133 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11136 em) space between the arrows.
11139 \begin_layout Description
11141 \begin_inset space ~
11145 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11149 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11153 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11157 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11161 \begin_inset space ~
11165 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11168 em) space between the arrows.
11171 \begin_layout Description
11173 \begin_inset space ~
11177 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11181 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11185 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11189 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11193 \begin_inset space ~
11197 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11200 em) space between the arrows.
11203 \begin_layout Description
11205 \begin_inset space ~
11209 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11213 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11218 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11222 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11225 cm space between the arrows.
11228 \begin_layout Standard
11230 \begin_inset space ~
11234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11236 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11240 lists the different space sizes.
11243 \begin_layout Standard
11244 \begin_inset Float table
11251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11252 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11255 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11257 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11261 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11271 \begin_inset Tabular
11272 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11273 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11274 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11275 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11315 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11339 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11363 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11387 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11391 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11395 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11419 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11443 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11458 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11471 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11486 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11499 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11514 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11527 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11548 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11550 \begin_inset Index idx
11553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11562 \begin_layout Standard
11563 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11564 feature for adding extra space
11565 in a uniform fashion.
11566 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11567 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11568 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11569 equally between themselves.
11572 \begin_layout Standard
11573 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11576 \begin_layout Quote
11578 This is on the left side
11579 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11582 This is on the right
11585 \begin_layout Quote
11588 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11592 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11598 \begin_layout Quote
11601 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11605 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11609 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11615 \begin_layout Standard
11616 That was an example in the
11622 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11626 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11630 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11633 is one in a standard paragraph.
11634 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11638 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11641 \begin_layout Standard
11642 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11645 \begin_inset space ~
11650 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11653 \begin_layout Standard
11655 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11659 \begin_inset space ~
11665 \begin_layout Standard
11667 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11671 \begin_inset space ~
11677 \begin_layout Standard
11679 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11683 \begin_inset space ~
11689 \begin_layout Standard
11691 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11695 \begin_inset space ~
11701 \begin_layout Standard
11703 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11707 \begin_inset space ~
11713 \begin_layout Standard
11715 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11719 \begin_inset space ~
11725 \begin_layout Standard
11726 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11734 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11738 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11740 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11741 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11745 option in the space dialog.
11753 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11757 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11762 \begin_inset Index idx
11765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11774 \begin_layout Standard
11775 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11776 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11779 \begin_layout Standard
11780 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11783 What is correct English?:
11784 \begin_inset Newline newline
11788 \begin_inset Newline newline
11792 \begin_inset space ~
11795 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11796 \begin_inset Newline newline
11800 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11811 \begin_inset Newline newline
11815 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11826 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11832 \begin_layout Standard
11834 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11839 \begin_inset space ~
11843 \begin_inset space ~
11847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11851 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11853 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11854 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11858 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11864 \begin_inset space ~
11868 \begin_inset space ~
11872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11875 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11884 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11885 That is why it is named
11886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11894 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11895 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11899 \begin_layout Subsection
11901 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11903 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11908 \begin_inset Index idx
11911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11920 \begin_layout Standard
11921 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11923 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11924 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11926 \begin_inset space ~
11932 There you find the following sizes:
11935 \begin_layout Standard
11948 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11949 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11954 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11956 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11957 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11959 \begin_inset space ~
11965 \begin_inset Index idx
11968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11969 Document ! Settings
11974 for the paragraph separation.
11975 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11986 \begin_layout Standard
11992 \begin_inset Index idx
11995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12001 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
12002 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12007 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12008 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12017 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12026 s are described in section
12027 \begin_inset space ~
12031 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12033 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12042 If there are several
12046 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12047 You can therefore use
12051 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12054 \begin_layout Standard
12059 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12060 \begin_inset space ~
12064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12066 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12073 \begin_layout Standard
12074 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12084 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12085 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12097 \begin_layout Subsection
12098 Paragraph Alignment
12099 \begin_inset Index idx
12102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12103 Paragraph ! Alignment
12111 \begin_layout Standard
12112 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12114 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12117 dialog (toolbar button
12120 arg "layout-paragraph"
12124 There are five possibilities:
12127 \begin_layout Itemize
12135 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12141 \begin_layout Itemize
12149 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12155 \begin_layout Itemize
12163 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12169 \begin_layout Itemize
12177 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12183 \begin_layout Itemize
12191 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12197 \begin_layout Standard
12198 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12199 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12200 the left and right margins.
12201 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12204 \begin_layout Standard
12206 This paragraph is right aligned,
12209 \begin_layout Standard
12211 this one is centered,
12214 \begin_layout Standard
12216 this one is left aligned.
12219 \begin_layout Subsection
12221 \begin_inset Index idx
12224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12225 Page breaks ! Forced
12231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12233 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12240 \begin_layout Standard
12241 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12242 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12243 force a page break where you want one.
12244 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12245 is good at page breaking.
12246 Only if you use a lot of
12250 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12251 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12254 \begin_layout Standard
12255 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12256 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12260 have to change the page breaking.
12263 \begin_layout Standard
12264 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12266 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12268 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12269 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12271 \begin_inset space ~
12277 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12279 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12280 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12282 \begin_inset space ~
12287 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12289 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12290 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12293 \begin_layout Standard
12294 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12295 at the top of a page.
12296 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12298 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12299 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12300 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12304 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12308 to learn more about
12315 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12317 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12319 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12324 \begin_inset Index idx
12327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12328 Page breaks ! Clear
12336 \begin_layout Standard
12337 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12338 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12339 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12340 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12341 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12344 \begin_layout Standard
12345 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12347 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12348 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12350 \begin_inset space ~
12356 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12358 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12359 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12361 \begin_inset space ~
12365 \begin_inset space ~
12370 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12371 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12374 \begin_layout Subsection
12376 \begin_inset Index idx
12379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12386 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12388 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12395 \begin_layout Standard
12396 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12398 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12400 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12401 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12403 \begin_inset space ~
12407 \begin_inset space ~
12415 arg "newline-insert newline"
12419 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12421 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12422 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12424 \begin_inset space ~
12428 \begin_inset space ~
12436 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12439 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12441 This is useful to avoid
12442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12449 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12452 \begin_layout Standard
12453 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12454 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12456 very good at line breaking.
12457 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12458 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12459 \begin_inset space ~
12463 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12465 reference "sec:Quote"
12470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12472 reference "sec:Verse"
12477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12479 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12486 \begin_layout Subsection
12488 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12490 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12495 \begin_inset Index idx
12498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12507 \begin_layout Standard
12509 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12520 \begin_layout Standard
12524 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12525 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12527 \begin_inset space ~
12532 you can insert horizontal lines.
12533 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12534 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12535 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12538 \begin_layout Standard
12540 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12551 \begin_layout Section
12552 Characters and Symbols
12555 \begin_layout Standard
12556 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12557 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12558 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12560 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12566 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12570 for information on how this is done.
12573 \begin_layout Standard
12574 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12579 dialog via the menu
12581 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12582 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12588 \begin_layout Standard
12589 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12597 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12598 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12600 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12608 \begin_layout Section
12609 Fonts and Text Styles
12610 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12612 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12619 \begin_layout Subsection
12621 \begin_inset Index idx
12624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12633 \begin_layout Standard
12634 There are two types of fonts:
12637 \begin_layout Description
12639 \begin_inset space ~
12643 \begin_inset Index idx
12646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12652 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12653 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12657 characters) in the font.
12658 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12659 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12660 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12661 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12662 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12663 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12664 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12665 \begin_inset Newline newline
12668 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12669 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12670 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12671 sizes than at small ones.
12672 \begin_inset Newline newline
12686 \begin_inset space ~
12694 \begin_layout Description
12696 \begin_inset space ~
12700 \begin_inset Index idx
12703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12709 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12710 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12711 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12712 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12713 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12714 image manipulation program.
12715 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12716 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12717 \begin_inset space ~
12720 pixels high up to 34
12721 \begin_inset space ~
12724 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12725 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12726 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12728 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12729 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12730 \begin_inset Newline newline
12733 Bitmap fonts are named
12736 \begin_inset space ~
12741 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12744 \begin_layout Standard
12745 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12746 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12747 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12748 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12749 use scalable fonts.
12752 \begin_layout Standard
12753 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12756 \begin_layout Standard
12757 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12759 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
12761 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757415
12764 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12765 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12766 font to emphasize text, you use an
12767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12775 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12777 In \SpecialChar LyX
12778 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12782 \begin_layout Subsection
12785 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12787 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12794 \begin_layout Standard
12795 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12796 used its own fonts.
12797 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12798 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12801 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12802 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12803 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12804 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12805 to a word processor.
12806 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12807 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12808 files are very portable across
12809 different machines.
12810 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12811 has increased a lot
12812 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12815 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12817 \begin_inset space ~
12821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12823 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12828 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12829 code in the document
12830 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12833 \begin_layout Standard
12834 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12835 engines that are also able directly
12836 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12838 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12840 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12842 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12843 that is installed on your system.
12844 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12847 \begin_layout Standard
12848 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12856 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12857 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12865 \begin_layout Subsection
12866 Document Font and Font size
12867 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12869 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12874 \begin_inset Index idx
12877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12884 \begin_inset Index idx
12887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12896 \begin_layout Standard
12897 You can set the document fonts in the
12899 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12903 \begin_inset Index idx
12906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12907 Document ! Settings
12917 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12918 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12921 \begin_inset space ~
12930 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12932 \begin_inset space ~
12935 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12938 \begin_layout Standard
12943 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12944 This requires that you use
12956 as the output format, i.
12957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12961 \begin_inset space \space{}
12964 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12965 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12966 installed (see section
12967 \begin_inset space ~
12971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12973 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12978 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12980 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12981 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12983 \begin_inset space ~
12986 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12987 cannot determine the family.
12988 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12989 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12992 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12995 \begin_layout Standard
12996 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12997 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
13002 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13008 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13010 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13012 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13015 font encoding, this is
13016 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13017 , depending on the document language,
13020 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13021 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13029 \begin_inset space ~
13035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13045 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13046 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13054 \begin_inset space ~
13060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13068 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13089 European Computer Modern
13092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13100 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13103 \begin_layout Standard
13108 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13109 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13114 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13117 \begin_inset space ~
13122 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13128 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13129 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13132 \begin_layout Itemize
13136 \begin_inset space ~
13141 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13154 \begin_inset space ~
13159 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13160 community in order to replace
13164 as the default font.
13165 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13166 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13169 \begin_inset space ~
13182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13183 One difference is improved kerning.
13191 \begin_layout Itemize
13192 If you do not like the look of
13200 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13201 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13205 \begin_inset space ~
13211 \begin_inset space ~
13221 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13222 \begin_inset space ~
13225 serif and typewriter fonts,
13229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13230 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13231 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13237 \begin_inset space ~
13246 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13247 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13251 \begin_inset space \space{}
13259 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13263 \begin_inset space \space{}
13269 \begin_inset space ~
13277 \begin_inset space ~
13287 but you can also select your own.
13288 \begin_inset Newline newline
13291 The differences between roman,
13294 \begin_inset space ~
13303 fonts are explained in section
13304 \begin_inset space ~
13308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13310 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13315 \begin_inset Newline newline
13321 \begin_inset space ~
13326 was originally designed for newspapers.
13327 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13328 into the small newspaper columns.
13332 \begin_inset space ~
13337 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13340 \begin_layout Standard
13341 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13354 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13359 depends on the class you are using.
13360 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13363 \begin_layout Standard
13364 Note that the font size is the
13369 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13370 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13371 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13372 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13375 \begin_inset space ~
13381 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13382 \begin_inset space ~
13386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13388 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13395 \begin_layout Standard
13399 \begin_inset space ~
13404 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13406 \begin_inset space ~
13409 serif or typewriter.
13414 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13424 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13427 \begin_layout Standard
13432 LaTeX font encoding
13434 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13435 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13441 \begin_inset Index idx
13444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13452 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13454 \begin_inset space ~
13458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13460 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13467 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13468 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13469 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13473 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13481 \begin_layout Standard
13482 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13484 Use Old Style Figures
13488 Use True Small Caps
13491 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13494 Use Old Style Figures
13496 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13498 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13499 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13503 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13506 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13510 Use True Small Caps
13512 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13513 of scaled capitals.
13514 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13515 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13516 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
13520 \begin_layout Standard
13522 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
13523 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
13524 provided by the font package (or the
13528 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
13533 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
13539 \begin_layout Standard
13544 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13545 a font to display the script characters.
13549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13550 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13556 \begin_inset Index idx
13559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13566 So this has no effect for the document language
13582 \begin_layout Standard
13585 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13587 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13588 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13594 \begin_inset Index idx
13597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13599 packages ! microtype
13608 \begin_layout Standard
13611 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13613 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13618 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13619 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13625 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13626 \begin_inset space ~
13630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13632 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13642 \begin_layout Standard
13643 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13647 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13655 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13660 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13661 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13663 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13665 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13668 dialog, see section
13669 \begin_inset space ~
13673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13675 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13687 \begin_layout Subsection
13691 \begin_layout Standard
13692 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13693 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13695 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13696 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13697 choose a math font in the dialog
13699 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13703 \begin_inset Index idx
13706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13707 Document ! Settings
13713 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13714 automatically selects a math font.
13715 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13716 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13725 \begin_inset space ~
13731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13736 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13737 document font is available.
13740 \begin_layout Standard
13741 Note that the math font will not be used for
13745 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13751 or by the insertion of the command
13758 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13759 \begin_inset space ~
13763 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13764 while the math characters do not.
13766 \begin_inset space ~
13769 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13772 \begin_inset space ~
13780 \begin_inset space ~
13785 in the document font settings.
13788 \begin_layout Standard
13789 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13790 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13791 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13792 font (in most cases
13793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13799 \begin_inset space ~
13805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13808 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13809 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13817 \begin_inset space ~
13823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13829 \begin_layout Subsection
13831 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
13833 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
13837 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
13839 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13841 name "subsec:charstyles"
13848 \begin_inset Index idx
13851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13858 \begin_inset Index idx
13861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13870 \begin_layout Standard
13871 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13872 automatically changes the
13873 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
13876 style for certain paragraph environments.
13878 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
13879 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
13881 This is where we meet the concept of
13887 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
13889 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
13893 \begin_layout Standard
13895 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
13900 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
13902 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
13915 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
13921 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13924 e., available with all document classes.
13925 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
13929 for specific purposes.
13930 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
13933 \begin_layout Standard
13935 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
13936 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
13946 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
13950 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
13951 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13963 — you customized the
13968 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
13969 among them, encourage the use of
13981 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
13982 \begin_inset space ~
13986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13988 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13993 Rather than fiddling with
13997 , they encourage the use of
14001 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
14002 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14006 \begin_inset Quotes els
14010 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14013 ), not their form (
14014 \begin_inset Quotes els
14018 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14022 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
14023 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
14024 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
14025 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
14026 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14027 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14033 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14034 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14037 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14038 With a semantic markup (such as
14042 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14047 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14049 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14050 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14053 \begin_layout Standard
14055 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14056 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14057 by \SpecialChar LyX
14063 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14065 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14066 Builtin Text Styles
14067 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14069 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14076 \begin_layout Standard
14078 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14079 The two builtin text styles can be
14080 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14084 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14088 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14089 both of these styles
14092 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14100 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14106 \begin_layout Standard
14111 style, do one of the following:
14114 \begin_layout Itemize
14115 click on the toolbar button
14124 \begin_layout Itemize
14125 use the key binding
14132 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14136 \begin_layout Itemize
14138 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14146 arg "dialog-show character"
14152 arg "dialog-show character"
14155 ) as described in section
14156 \begin_inset space ~
14160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14162 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14171 \begin_layout Standard
14172 These commands are all toggles.
14177 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14180 \begin_layout Standard
14181 One typically uses the
14185 style for proper names.
14187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14194 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14200 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14204 \begin_layout Standard
14206 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14211 is producing text in
14215 , but the definition can be changed.
14220 \begin_layout Standard
14222 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14224 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14232 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14239 \begin_layout Itemize
14240 clicking on the toolbar button
14249 \begin_layout Itemize
14250 using the keybindings
14257 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14261 \begin_layout Itemize
14263 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14271 arg "dialog-show character"
14277 arg "dialog-show character"
14280 ) as described in section
14281 \begin_inset space ~
14285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14287 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14296 \begin_layout Standard
14301 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14303 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14305 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14308 packages use a different font
14309 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14310 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14316 \begin_layout Standard
14317 We've been using the
14321 style all over the place in this document.
14322 Here's one more example:
14325 \begin_layout Quotation
14329 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14331 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14337 \begin_layout Standard
14338 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14339 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14340 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14341 the common tendency to overuse
14342 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14344 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14349 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14353 \begin_layout Standard
14355 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14356 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14357 only as font changes and integrated in the
14365 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14368 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14375 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14377 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14381 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14384 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14386 \begin_inset space ~
14389 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14391 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14397 arg "dialog-show character"
14403 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14405 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14411 arg "dialog-show character"
14415 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14419 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14421 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14423 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14425 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14432 \begin_layout Standard
14434 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14435 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14437 \begin_inset space ~
14441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14443 reference "subsec:Modules"
14450 ), or local layout settings (see section
14451 \begin_inset space ~
14455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14457 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14462 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14466 markup for specific functions.
14467 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14472 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14482 \begin_inset Quotes els
14486 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14492 \begin_layout Standard
14494 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14495 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14497 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14503 \begin_layout Standard
14505 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14506 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14511 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14512 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14513 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14518 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
14519 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14524 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14532 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14533 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
14534 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14535 \begin_inset Flex Code
14538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14540 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14549 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14554 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
14563 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14568 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
14577 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
14578 on screen their formal appearance.
14583 \begin_layout Subsection
14585 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
14587 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
14591 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
14597 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
14599 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
14605 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
14607 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
14611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14613 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14618 \begin_inset Index idx
14621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14630 \begin_layout Standard
14631 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
14632 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
14635 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
14637 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
14639 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
14643 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
14644 the properties of text passages
14645 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
14649 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14650 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14651 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14652 from ordinary dialog.
14653 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
14657 \begin_layout Standard
14659 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
14660 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
14661 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
14662 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
14663 the properties of the respective text passages.
14668 comes in as a last resort.
14673 \begin_layout Standard
14674 Before we document how to
14675 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
14676 use custom character style
14677 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
14678 tweak the text properties
14680 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
14681 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
14683 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
14687 \begin_inset Newline newline
14690 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14691 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14694 \begin_layout Standard
14696 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
14697 use custom character styles
14698 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
14699 tweak text properties
14702 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
14705 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14707 \begin_inset space ~
14710 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14712 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
14718 arg "dialog-show character"
14723 dialog or press the toolbar button
14726 arg "dialog-show character"
14731 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
14734 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14735 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
14737 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
14740 property that you can choose.
14741 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14744 \begin_inset space ~
14749 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14751 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
14755 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
14757 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
14762 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14763 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14764 environments all at once.
14767 \begin_layout Standard
14769 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
14771 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
14774 properties, and their options (in addition to
14777 \begin_inset space ~
14783 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
14787 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
14795 \begin_layout Labeling
14796 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14810 The possible options are:
14814 \begin_layout Labeling
14815 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14820 This is the Roman font family.
14821 Normally a serif font.
14822 It's also the default family.
14832 \begin_layout Labeling
14833 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14837 \begin_inset space ~
14844 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14856 \begin_layout Labeling
14857 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14864 This is the Typewriter font family.
14870 arg "font-typewriter"
14876 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
14880 \begin_layout Standard
14882 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
14883 The general differences of these families are:
14886 \begin_layout Itemize
14888 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
14893 fonts use characters with serifs.
14894 These are the small
14895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14902 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14903 The following example shows the difference:
14904 \begin_inset Newline newline
14908 \begin_inset Newline newline
14913 text without serifs
14916 \begin_inset Newline newline
14919 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14920 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14927 \begin_layout Itemize
14929 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14934 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14935 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14936 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14939 \begin_layout Itemize
14941 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14954 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14972 \begin_inset Newline newline
14976 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14981 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14992 \begin_inset Note Note
14995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14997 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14998 For more on phantoms see section
14999 \begin_inset space ~
15003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15005 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15015 \begin_inset Newline newline
15024 \begin_layout Labeling
15025 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15030 This corresponds to the print weight.
15035 \begin_layout Labeling
15036 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15041 This is the Medium font series.
15042 It's also the default series.
15045 \begin_layout Labeling
15046 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15053 This is the Bold font series.
15066 \begin_layout Labeling
15067 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15072 As the name implies.
15077 \begin_layout Labeling
15078 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15083 This is the Upright font shape.
15084 It's also the default shape.
15087 \begin_layout Labeling
15088 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15098 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15103 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15108 s the Italic font shape
15114 \begin_layout Labeling
15115 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15122 This is the Slanted font shape
15124 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15125 , this is different from italic).
15128 \begin_layout Labeling
15129 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15133 \begin_inset space ~
15140 This is the Small caps font shape
15147 \begin_layout Labeling
15148 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15153 Alters the text color.
15154 Note that not all DVI
15155 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
15157 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15160 viewers are able to display colors.
15162 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15166 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15168 \begin_inset space ~
15175 , which means that the document default color set in
15177 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15178 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15184 \begin_inset space ~
15190 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15192 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15196 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15276 \begin_inset Index idx
15279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15288 \begin_layout Labeling
15289 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15294 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15295 the language of the document.
15296 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15297 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15298 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15301 in blue to indicate the change
15302 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15303 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15307 \begin_inset Newline newline
15310 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15312 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15313 When using the spell checking (see section
15314 \begin_inset space ~
15318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15320 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15324 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15325 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15327 \begin_inset Newline newline
15330 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15332 Exclude from Spellchecking
15335 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15338 \begin_layout Labeling
15339 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15344 Alters the size of the font.
15346 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15348 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15352 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15355 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15356 document font size.
15357 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15358 the details, but a general description of what
15364 \begin_layout Labeling
15365 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15386 arg "font-size tiny"
15392 \begin_layout Labeling
15393 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15414 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15420 \begin_layout Labeling
15421 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15442 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15448 \begin_layout Labeling
15449 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15470 arg "font-size small"
15476 \begin_layout Labeling
15477 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15491 It's also the default size.
15495 arg "font-size normal"
15501 \begin_layout Labeling
15502 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15523 arg "font-size large"
15529 \begin_layout Labeling
15530 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15551 arg "font-size larger"
15557 \begin_layout Labeling
15558 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15579 arg "font-size largest"
15585 \begin_layout Labeling
15586 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15607 arg "font-size huge"
15613 \begin_layout Labeling
15614 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15635 arg "font-size giant"
15641 \begin_layout Labeling
15642 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15647 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
15648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15667 arg "font-size increase"
15673 \begin_layout Labeling
15674 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15679 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
15680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15699 arg "font-size decrease"
15706 \begin_layout Standard
15711 : don't go crazy with this feature.
15712 You should almost never need to change the font size.
15714 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
15715 — use those instead.
15716 This is here for fine-tuning only!
15719 \begin_layout Labeling
15720 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15722 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
15726 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
15732 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
15733 change a few other things at the character level
15734 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
15735 have text passages being underlined
15739 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
15740 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
15741 days, when you could not change fonts.
15742 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15743 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15744 because some people
15748 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15755 \begin_layout Labeling
15756 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15758 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
15765 This is text with emphasize on
15768 This might seem like the same as
15772 , but it is actually a bit different.
15778 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
15780 Normally this font is equal to italic.
15781 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
15785 \begin_layout Labeling
15786 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15788 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
15793 Don't use underlining.
15798 \begin_layout Labeling
15799 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15801 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
15805 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
15813 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
15815 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
15824 arg "font-underline"
15830 \begin_inset Newline newline
15834 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
15837 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
15838 when you could not change fonts.
15839 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15840 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15841 because some people
15845 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15850 \begin_layout Labeling
15851 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15855 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
15857 \begin_inset space ~
15866 This is text with Double under
15867 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
15869 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
15878 arg "font-underunderline"
15882 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
15884 \begin_inset Newline newline
15887 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
15888 about double underbar
15893 \begin_layout Labeling
15894 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15898 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
15900 \begin_inset space ~
15909 This is text with Wavy under
15910 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
15912 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
15921 arg "font-underwave"
15925 \begin_inset Newline newline
15928 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
15929 Keep antinausea pills handy.
15930 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
15935 \begin_layout Labeling
15936 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15938 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
15943 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
15949 \begin_layout Labeling
15950 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15952 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
15957 Don't use strikethrough.
15960 \begin_layout Labeling
15961 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15965 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
15967 \begin_inset space ~
15971 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
15979 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
15981 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
15982 Single strikethrough
15990 arg "font-strikeout"
15994 \begin_inset Newline newline
15997 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
15998 changed in the meantime.
16001 \begin_layout Labeling
16002 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16004 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
16008 \begin_inset space ~
16012 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
16014 \begin_inset space ~
16018 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
16026 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16028 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16034 \begin_inset Newline newline
16037 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16041 \begin_layout Standard
16043 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
16044 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
16045 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
16046 \begin_inset space ~
16050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16052 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16059 \begin_layout Itemize
16061 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
16068 This is text with emphasize on
16073 \begin_layout Itemize
16077 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
16084 This is text with Noun on.
16086 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
16093 , this is a logical attribute.
16094 Normally it's equivalent to
16097 \begin_inset space ~
16107 \begin_layout Standard
16108 So you have a huge number of combinations to
16109 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
16111 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
16116 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
16117 chosen a new character style
16118 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
16119 applied a text property
16122 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
16125 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16127 \begin_inset space ~
16130 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16132 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
16138 arg "dialog-show character"
16146 arg "dialog-show character"
16149 ) dialog, the settings are
16150 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
16154 You can activate the
16155 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
16157 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
16158 last applied properties
16160 by using the toolbar button
16163 arg "textstyle-apply"
16167 The button lets you apply
16168 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16169 your custom character style
16170 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16173 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16175 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16176 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16177 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16178 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16183 \begin_layout Standard
16184 To completely reset the
16185 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16187 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16188 text properties of a selection
16190 to the default, use
16191 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16193 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16203 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16208 from the menu of the toolbar button
16211 arg "textstyle-apply"
16218 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16219 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16220 you just set the shape to
16221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16239 \begin_inset space ~
16253 \begin_layout Standard
16255 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16256 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16264 \begin_inset space ~
16276 \begin_layout Itemize
16278 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16291 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16309 \begin_inset Newline newline
16313 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16327 \begin_inset Note Note
16330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16331 For more on phantoms see section
16332 \begin_inset space ~
16336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16338 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16348 \begin_inset Newline newline
16354 \begin_layout Itemize
16356 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16361 fonts use characters with serifs.
16362 These are the small
16363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16370 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16371 The following example shows the difference:
16372 \begin_inset Newline newline
16376 \begin_inset Newline newline
16381 text without serifs
16384 \begin_inset Newline newline
16387 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16388 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16395 \begin_layout Itemize
16397 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16402 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16403 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16404 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16409 \begin_layout Standard
16411 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16419 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16420 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16423 \begin_inset space ~
16428 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16429 the property to be removed.
16430 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16431 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16432 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16450 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16451 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16459 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16463 \begin_inset space ~
16468 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16479 If you, for example, set
16480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16498 \begin_inset space ~
16503 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16512 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16517 \begin_layout Standard
16519 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16522 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16523 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16526 \begin_layout Section
16527 Printing and Previewing
16530 \begin_layout Subsection
16534 \begin_layout Standard
16535 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16536 using \SpecialChar LyX
16537 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16538 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16539 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16540 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16542 Additional Features
16547 \begin_layout Standard
16549 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16552 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16553 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16554 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16557 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16558 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16559 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16560 to turn your writing into printable output.
16561 This happens in two stages:
16564 \begin_layout Enumerate
16565 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16566 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16568 a file with the extension,
16569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16583 \begin_layout Enumerate
16584 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
16585 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16586 to use the commands in the
16590 file to produce printable output.
16593 \begin_layout Subsection
16594 Output file formats
16595 \begin_inset Index idx
16598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16607 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
16614 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16615 Simple text (ASCII)
16616 \begin_inset Index idx
16619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16620 File formats ! ASCII
16628 \begin_layout Standard
16629 This file type has the extension
16630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16642 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
16643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16646 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
16647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16653 \begin_layout Standard
16654 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
16656 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16657 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16659 \begin_inset space ~
16665 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
16666 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
16667 bibliography (section
16668 \begin_inset space ~
16672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16674 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
16679 If your document includes such material, use
16681 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16682 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16684 \begin_inset space ~
16688 \begin_inset space ~
16692 \begin_inset space ~
16700 \begin_inset space ~
16704 \begin_inset space ~
16710 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
16711 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
16714 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16717 \begin_inset Index idx
16720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16721 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
16730 \begin_layout Standard
16731 This file type has the extension
16732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16743 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16746 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
16747 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
16748 -Errors or to process it manually
16749 with console commands.
16750 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
16751 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
16752 's temporary directory whenever you
16753 view or export your document.
16756 \begin_layout Standard
16757 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
16758 -file using the menu
16760 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16761 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16765 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
16766 export variants are explained in section
16767 \begin_inset space ~
16771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16773 reference "subsec:Export"
16780 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16782 \begin_inset Index idx
16785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16794 \begin_layout Standard
16795 This file type has the extension
16796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16816 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
16817 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
16818 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
16822 \begin_layout Standard
16823 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
16824 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
16825 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
16826 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
16827 when you view the DVI.
16828 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
16831 \begin_layout Standard
16832 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
16834 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16835 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16840 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16841 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16843 \begin_inset space ~
16849 The latter option uses the program
16851 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16857 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16860 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16861 font access (see section
16862 \begin_inset space ~
16866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16868 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16873 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16874 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16879 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16881 \begin_inset Index idx
16884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16885 File formats ! PostScript
16893 \begin_layout Standard
16894 This file type has the extension
16895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16907 PostScript was developed by the company
16911 as a printer language.
16912 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
16914 PostScript can be seen as a
16915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16918 programming language
16919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16922 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
16926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16927 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16934 \begin_inset Index idx
16937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16939 packages ! pstricks
16949 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
16952 \begin_layout Standard
16953 PostScript can only contain images in the format
16954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16957 Encapsulated PostScript
16958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16961 (EPS, file extension
16962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16974 As \SpecialChar LyX
16975 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
16976 convert them in the background to EPS.
16977 If, for example, you have 50
16978 \begin_inset space ~
16981 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
16983 \begin_inset space ~
16986 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
16987 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
16989 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
16990 EPS to avoid this problem.
16993 \begin_layout Standard
16994 You can export to PostScript using the menu
16996 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16997 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17003 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17005 \begin_inset Index idx
17008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17015 \begin_inset Index idx
17018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17027 \begin_layout Standard
17028 This file type has the extension
17029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17045 Portable Document Format
17046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17053 was derived from PostScript.
17054 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
17056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17063 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
17064 looks exactly the same.
17067 \begin_layout Standard
17068 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
17069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17072 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17076 (JPG, file extension
17077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17104 Portable Network Graphics
17105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17108 (PNG, file extension
17109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17121 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17122 converts them in the
17123 background to one of these formats.
17124 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17125 will slow down your workflow.
17126 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17129 \begin_layout Standard
17130 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17132 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17138 \begin_layout Description
17140 \begin_inset space ~
17143 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17147 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17150 \begin_layout Description
17152 \begin_inset space ~
17159 ) This uses the program
17161 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17164 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17167 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17170 is a new engine, derived from
17174 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17175 access (see section
17176 \begin_inset space ~
17180 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17182 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17187 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17188 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17193 \begin_layout Description
17195 \begin_inset space ~
17202 ) This uses the program
17207 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17213 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17214 font access (see section
17215 \begin_inset space ~
17219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17221 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17226 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17227 vertically written Japanese.
17230 \begin_layout Description
17232 \begin_inset space ~
17235 (cropped) This is the same as
17238 \begin_inset space ~
17243 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17244 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17245 to generate good-looking
17246 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17249 \begin_layout Description
17251 \begin_inset space ~
17254 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17258 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17262 \begin_layout Description
17264 \begin_inset space ~
17267 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17271 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17272 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17276 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17277 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17280 \begin_layout Standard
17284 \begin_inset space ~
17293 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17294 works without problems.
17295 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17296 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17300 \begin_inset space ~
17308 \begin_inset space ~
17313 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17321 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17323 \begin_inset Index idx
17326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17327 FileFormats ! XHTML
17333 \begin_inset Index idx
17336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17345 \begin_layout Standard
17346 This file type has the extension
17347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17359 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17360 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17361 When \SpecialChar LyX
17362 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17363 suitable for the purpose.
17364 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17366 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17367 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17370 between different formats, which are described in section
17372 Math Output in XHTML
17377 \begin_inset space ~
17385 \begin_layout Standard
17386 XHTML output remains
17387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17394 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17395 features are supported yet.
17399 and the World Wide Web
17403 Additional Features
17405 manual, for more information.
17408 \begin_layout Standard
17409 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17411 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17412 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17418 \begin_layout Subsection
17420 \begin_inset Index idx
17423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17432 \begin_layout Standard
17433 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17434 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17443 or use the toolbar button
17450 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17451 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17452 \begin_inset space ~
17456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17458 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17462 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17464 \begin_inset space ~
17468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17470 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17475 Further output formats can be selected via
17477 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17478 View (Other Formats)
17480 or the toolbar button
17489 \begin_layout Standard
17490 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17491 viewer window using the menu
17493 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17498 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17499 Update (Other Formats)
17504 \begin_layout Standard
17505 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17508 To have a real output, export your document.
17511 \begin_layout Section
17512 A few Words about Typography
17513 \begin_inset Index idx
17516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17525 \begin_layout Subsection
17526 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17527 \begin_inset Index idx
17530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17537 \begin_inset Index idx
17540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17549 \begin_layout Standard
17550 In \SpecialChar LyX
17552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17563 symbol comes in four variants: the
17580 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17586 \begin_layout Standard
17587 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17597 height_special "totalheight"
17602 backgroundcolor "none"
17605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17606 \begin_inset Tabular
17607 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
17608 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17609 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17610 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17611 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17612 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17613 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17641 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17642 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17681 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17682 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17704 system key combination
17708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17709 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
17712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17721 and the em dash with
17724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17737 is the Mac label for the right
17748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17761 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17762 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17784 system key combination or
17785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17799 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17812 \begin_inset Formula $-$
17820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17851 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17857 \begin_layout Standard
17858 Dashes can also be inserted with
17860 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17862 \begin_inset space ~
17865 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
17873 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
17874 and 2014 for the en dash).
17877 \begin_layout Standard
17878 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
17879 mode and has a length of its own.
17880 Here are some examples:
17883 \begin_layout Enumerate
17884 line- and page-breaks
17885 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17895 \begin_layout Enumerate
17897 \begin_inset space ~
17901 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17911 \begin_layout Enumerate
17912 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
17913 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17923 \begin_layout Enumerate
17924 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
17928 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17938 \begin_layout Standard
17940 \begin_inset CommandInset href
17942 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
17943 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
17951 \begin_layout Subsection
17952 Dashes and Line Breaks
17953 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17955 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
17962 \begin_layout Standard
17963 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
17964 case and locale, e.
17965 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17971 \begin_layout Itemize
17972 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
17973 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
17976 \begin_layout Itemize
17977 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
17981 \begin_layout Itemize
17982 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
17983 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
17986 \begin_layout Standard
17987 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
17988 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17999 allows line breaks after hyphens
18000 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
18002 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
18005 en-dashes and em-dashes.
18008 \begin_layout Enumerate
18009 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
18010 \begin_inset space ~
18013 – common in British English and generally recommended by
18015 The Elements of Typographic Style
18018 \begin_inset space ~
18021 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
18024 \begin_layout Enumerate
18025 Unwanted line breaks
18030 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
18032 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
18035 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
18039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18042 Prevent Hyphenation
18047 \begin_inset space ~
18063 in \SpecialChar TeX
18065 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
18066 , a protected space does not suffice
18070 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
18075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18077 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
18078 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
18079 in the document language.
18080 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
18094 \begin_layout Itemize
18096 \begin_inset space ~
18100 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18110 height_special "totalheight"
18115 backgroundcolor "none"
18118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18127 \begin_layout Itemize
18129 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18139 height_special "totalheight"
18144 backgroundcolor "none"
18147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18149 \begin_inset space ~
18157 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18158 \begin_inset space ~
18161 – sont très utiles.
18164 \begin_layout Itemize
18169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18178 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18182 \begin_layout Standard
18183 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18184 \begin_inset space ~
18187 – in contrast to an overfull line
18188 \begin_inset space ~
18191 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18195 \begin_layout Standard
18196 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18199 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18200 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18201 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18202 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18207 \begin_layout Enumerate
18208 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18209 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18210 or \SpecialChar TeX
18216 \begin_layout Itemize
18218 \begin_inset space ~
18221 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18222 \begin_inset space ~
18225 – sont très utiles.
18229 \begin_layout Enumerate
18230 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18231 \begin_inset Newline newline
18236 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18237 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18239 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
18241 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
18243 \begin_inset space ~
18249 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
18251 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
18253 \begin_inset space ~
18264 \begin_layout Itemize
18265 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18266 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18267 should be followed by
18268 a line break opportunity.
18271 \begin_layout Standard
18272 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18273 \begin_inset space ~
18277 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18279 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18290 \begin_layout Enumerate
18291 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18292 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18293 or en dashes (see section
18294 \begin_inset space ~
18298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18300 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18310 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18311 Changes and backwards compatibility
18314 \begin_layout Standard
18315 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18317 \begin_inset space ~
18320 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18321 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18330 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18331 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18339 \begin_layout Standard
18340 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18342 \begin_inset space ~
18345 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18347 prevents ligation to dashes.
18349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18356 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18361 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18362 after the input (unless the current text font is
18370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18371 The behavior was changed since
18372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18387 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18388 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18389 as non-breakable dashes.
18390 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18399 \begin_layout Standard
18402 \begin_inset space ~
18410 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18412 \begin_inset space ~
18415 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18418 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18419 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18420 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18421 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18423 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18427 If you used both literal and
18428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18435 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18437 \begin_inset space ~
18440 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18441 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18444 \begin_layout Subsection
18446 \begin_inset Index idx
18449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18456 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18458 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18465 \begin_layout Standard
18466 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18467 but automatically in the output.
18468 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18474 \begin_inset Index idx
18477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18484 following the rules of the document language.
18486 does not hyphenate text in the
18490 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18493 \begin_layout Standard
18495 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18499 font and with unusual constructs, like
18500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18508 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18509 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18510 This is done with the menu
18512 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18513 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18515 \begin_inset space ~
18521 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18523 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18527 \begin_layout Standard
18528 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18529 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18540 would then see the hyphen
18541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18548 as a line break possibility.
18549 A line break at this point would look ugly.
18550 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
18553 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18554 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18557 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
18559 Prevent Hyphenation
18564 \begin_inset space ~
18572 \begin_layout Subsection
18574 \begin_inset Index idx
18577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18586 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18587 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
18588 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18590 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
18597 \begin_layout Standard
18598 When \SpecialChar LyX
18599 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18600 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18602 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
18605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18608 appropriate amount of space.
18609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18612 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
18614 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
18615 gets after another word.
18618 \begin_layout Standard
18619 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
18620 not work in all cases.
18622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18633 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
18634 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
18637 \begin_layout Standard
18638 Here are some examples of
18642 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
18645 \begin_layout Itemize
18650 \begin_layout Itemize
18655 \begin_layout Standard
18656 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
18659 \begin_layout Itemize
18661 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18665 this is too much space!
18668 \begin_layout Itemize
18673 \begin_layout Standard
18674 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
18677 \begin_layout Standard
18678 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
18681 \begin_layout Enumerate
18685 \begin_inset space ~
18690 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
18691 \begin_inset space ~
18695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18697 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
18702 \begin_inset Index idx
18705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18706 Spaces ! inter-word
18714 \begin_layout Enumerate
18718 \begin_inset space ~
18723 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
18724 \begin_inset space ~
18728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18730 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
18735 \begin_inset Index idx
18738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18747 \begin_layout Enumerate
18751 \begin_inset space ~
18755 \begin_inset space ~
18759 \begin_inset space ~
18766 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18768 \begin_inset space ~
18773 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
18774 This function is also bound to
18777 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
18783 \begin_layout Standard
18784 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
18787 \begin_layout Itemize
18789 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18793 \begin_inset space \space{}
18796 this is too much space!
18799 \begin_layout Itemize
18800 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
18804 \begin_layout Standard
18805 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
18806 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
18808 will take care of this.
18811 \begin_layout Standard
18812 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
18816 \begin_inset space ~
18822 feature described in the section
18824 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
18829 Additional Features
18834 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18836 \begin_inset Index idx
18839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18840 Typography ! Quotation marks
18846 \begin_inset Index idx
18849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18850 Quotation marks | see
18854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18880 \begin_layout Standard
18882 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
18883 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
18884 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
18886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18894 The keyboard character,
18898 , generates this automatically.
18901 \begin_layout Standard
18902 You can specify what character the
18906 key produces by using the submenu
18912 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18916 \begin_inset Index idx
18919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18920 Document ! Settings
18925 dialog and switching the
18929 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
18930 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
18932 \begin_inset space ~
18938 \begin_layout Labeling
18939 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18951 \begin_inset space ~
18955 \begin_inset space ~
18959 \begin_inset Quotes els
18963 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18977 \begin_inset Quotes els
18981 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18984 quotation marks (as common, e.
18985 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18991 \begin_layout Labeling
18992 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18995 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18999 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19003 \begin_inset space ~
19007 \begin_inset space ~
19011 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19015 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19021 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19025 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19029 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19033 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19036 quotation marks (as common, e.
19037 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19043 \begin_layout Labeling
19044 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19047 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19051 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19055 \begin_inset space ~
19059 \begin_inset space ~
19063 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19067 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19073 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19077 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19081 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19085 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19088 quotation marks (as common, e.
19089 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19095 \begin_layout Labeling
19096 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19099 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19103 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19107 \begin_inset space ~
19111 \begin_inset space ~
19115 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19119 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19125 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19129 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19133 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19137 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19140 quotation marks (as common, e.
19141 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19147 \begin_layout Labeling
19148 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19151 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19155 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19159 \begin_inset space ~
19163 \begin_inset space ~
19167 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19171 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19177 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19181 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19185 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19189 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19192 quotation marks (as common, e.
19193 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19196 g., in Switzerland)
19199 \begin_layout Labeling
19200 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19203 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19207 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19211 \begin_inset space ~
19215 \begin_inset space ~
19219 \begin_inset Quotes als
19223 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19229 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19233 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19237 \begin_inset Quotes als
19241 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19244 quotation marks (as common, e.
19245 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19251 \begin_layout Labeling
19252 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19255 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19259 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19263 \begin_inset space ~
19267 \begin_inset space ~
19271 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19275 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19281 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19285 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19289 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19293 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19296 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19299 \begin_layout Labeling
19300 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19303 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19307 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19311 \begin_inset space ~
19315 \begin_inset space ~
19319 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19323 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19329 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19333 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19337 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19341 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19344 quotation marks (as common, e.
19345 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19348 g., in Great Britain)
19351 \begin_layout Labeling
19352 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19355 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19359 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19363 \begin_inset space ~
19367 \begin_inset space ~
19371 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19375 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19381 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19385 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19389 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19393 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19396 quotation marks (as common, e.
19397 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19403 \begin_layout Labeling
19404 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19407 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19411 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19415 \begin_inset space ~
19419 \begin_inset space ~
19423 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19427 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19433 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19437 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19441 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19445 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19448 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19453 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19454 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19455 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19456 the inner marks differ).
19464 \begin_layout Labeling
19465 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19468 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19472 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19476 \begin_inset space ~
19480 \begin_inset space ~
19484 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19488 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19494 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19498 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19502 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19506 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19509 quotation marks (as common, e.
19510 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19516 \begin_layout Labeling
19517 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19520 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19524 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19528 \begin_inset space ~
19532 \begin_inset space ~
19536 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19540 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19546 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19550 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19554 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19558 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19561 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19564 \begin_layout Labeling
19565 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19566 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19574 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19580 \begin_inset space ~
19584 \begin_inset space ~
19590 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19598 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19602 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19606 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19610 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19614 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19617 quotation marks (as common, e.
19618 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19626 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19627 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19635 \begin_layout Labeling
19636 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19637 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19645 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19651 \begin_inset space ~
19655 \begin_inset space ~
19661 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19669 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19673 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19677 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19681 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19685 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19688 quotation marks (as common, e.
19689 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19692 g., in North Korea and China)
19696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19697 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19698 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19706 \begin_layout Standard
19707 Inner quotation marks
19711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19712 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
19713 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
19714 case (and specifically the British style shows that
19715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19722 does not necessarily mean
19723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19731 This is why we call them
19732 \begin_inset Quotes els
19736 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19752 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
19754 \begin_inset Quotes els
19758 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19761 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
19764 arg "quote-insert inner"
19769 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19775 \begin_layout Standard
19776 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
19777 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
19778 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
19779 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
19780 If you check the setting
19782 Use dynamic quotation marks
19786 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19787 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19790 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
19791 they appear in a special color).
19792 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
19793 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
19795 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19798 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
19801 \begin_layout Standard
19802 Individual quotation marks (i.
19803 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19806 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
19807 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
19811 \begin_layout Subsection
19813 \begin_inset Index idx
19816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19817 Typography ! Ligatures
19823 \begin_inset Index idx
19826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19855 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19857 name "subsec:Ligatures"
19864 \begin_layout Standard
19865 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
19866 print them as single characters.
19867 These groups are known as
19872 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
19873 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
19875 Here are the standard ligatures:
19878 \begin_layout Itemize
19882 \begin_layout Itemize
19886 \begin_layout Itemize
19890 \begin_layout Itemize
19894 \begin_layout Itemize
19898 \begin_layout Standard
19899 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
19902 \begin_layout Standard
19903 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
19904 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
19905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19912 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
19913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19928 To break a ligature, use
19930 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19931 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19933 \begin_inset space ~
19940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19951 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19968 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19976 \begin_layout Subsection
19978 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
19980 \begin_inset Index idx
19983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19993 \begin_layout Standard
19996 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19997 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
20001 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
20004 \begin_layout Description
20006 The name of the game.
20009 \begin_layout Description
20011 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
20015 \begin_layout Description
20017 The \SpecialChar TeX
20018 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
20022 \begin_layout Description
20023 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
20024 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20028 \begin_layout Standard
20029 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20035 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
20039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20043 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
20044 world to give programs geek version numbers.
20045 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
20046 converges to the number
20047 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
20050 : The actual version is
20051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20059 , the previous one was
20060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20071 \begin_layout Subsection
20073 \begin_inset Index idx
20076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20085 \begin_layout Standard
20086 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
20087 space between two words.
20088 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
20091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20098 for units use the menu
20100 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20101 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20103 \begin_inset space ~
20111 arg "space-insert thin"
20117 \begin_layout Standard
20118 Here is an example to show the differences:
20121 \begin_layout Standard
20122 \begin_inset Tabular
20123 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
20124 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20125 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20126 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20133 \begin_inset space ~
20137 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20149 space between number and unit
20156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20161 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20165 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20177 half space between number and unit
20190 \begin_layout Subsection
20192 \begin_inset Index idx
20195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20196 Typography ! Widows and orphans
20204 \begin_layout Standard
20205 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
20207 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
20208 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
20209 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
20210 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
20211 These bits of text became known as
20222 \begin_layout Standard
20223 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
20224 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20225 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20226 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
20227 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
20228 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20229 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
20230 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
20231 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
20232 \begin_inset Newline newline
20240 \begin_inset Newline newline
20248 \begin_inset Newline newline
20251 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20252 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20253 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20255 \begin_inset space ~
20259 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20261 key "latexcompanion"
20267 \begin_inset space ~
20271 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20278 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20279 's page break mechanism.
20282 \begin_layout Chapter
20283 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20284 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20286 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20293 \begin_layout Standard
20294 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20297 \begin_inset space ~
20303 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20306 \begin_layout Section
20308 \begin_inset Index idx
20311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20318 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20327 \begin_layout Standard
20329 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20332 \begin_layout Description
20335 \begin_inset space ~
20338 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20339 \begin_inset Newline newline
20343 \begin_inset Note Note
20346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20347 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20355 \begin_layout Description
20356 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20357 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20358 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20361 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20362 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20364 \begin_inset space ~
20370 \begin_inset Newline newline
20374 \begin_inset Note Comment
20377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20378 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20387 \begin_layout Description
20389 \begin_inset space ~
20392 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20393 set in the document settings under
20395 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20397 \begin_inset space ~
20403 \begin_inset Newline newline
20407 \begin_inset Newline newline
20411 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20420 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20421 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20426 of a comment that appears in the output.
20432 \begin_inset Newline newline
20436 \begin_inset Newline newline
20439 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20442 \begin_layout Standard
20443 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20451 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20455 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20458 \begin_layout Section
20460 \begin_inset Index idx
20463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20472 name "sec:Footnotes"
20479 \begin_layout Standard
20481 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20484 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20487 or the toolbar button
20490 arg "footnote-insert"
20502 \begin_inset Graphics
20503 filename clipart/footnote.png
20512 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20513 's representation of your footnote.
20523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20542 label, the box will
20546 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
20547 Clicking on the box label again will close
20560 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
20561 and click on the footnote
20576 \begin_layout Standard
20577 Here is an example footnote:
20585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20586 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
20594 \begin_layout Standard
20595 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
20596 position where the footnote box is placed.
20597 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
20598 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
20599 according to the document class.
20601 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
20602 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20608 ey are described in the
20611 \begin_inset space ~
20619 \begin_layout Section
20621 \begin_inset Index idx
20624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20631 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20633 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
20640 \begin_layout Standard
20641 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
20643 When you insert a margin note via the menu
20645 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20647 \begin_inset space ~
20652 or the toolbar button
20655 arg "marginalnote-insert"
20674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20681 appearing within your text.
20682 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20683 's representation of your margin
20692 \begin_layout Standard
20693 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
20697 \begin_inset Marginal
20700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20702 This is a marginal note.
20710 \begin_layout Standard
20711 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
20712 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
20713 pages, right on odd pages.
20716 \begin_layout Standard
20717 For further information about marginal notes see the section
20720 \begin_inset space ~
20728 \begin_inset space ~
20736 \begin_layout Section
20737 Graphics and Images
20738 \begin_inset Index idx
20741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20748 \begin_inset Index idx
20751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20758 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20760 name "sec:Graphics"
20767 \begin_layout Standard
20768 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
20769 you want and click on the toolbar icon
20772 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
20777 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20781 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
20784 \begin_layout Standard
20785 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
20790 tab allows you to choose your image file.
20791 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
20793 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
20794 \begin_inset space ~
20798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20800 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
20807 \begin_layout Standard
20812 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
20813 of the image in the output.
20814 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
20818 \begin_inset space ~
20822 \begin_inset space ~
20831 \begin_inset space ~
20835 \begin_inset space ~
20839 \begin_inset space ~
20844 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
20845 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
20853 \begin_layout Standard
20857 \begin_inset space ~
20861 \begin_inset space ~
20866 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
20867 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
20869 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
20874 \begin_inset space ~
20879 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
20880 with the image size is printed.
20883 \begin_layout Standard
20884 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
20885 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
20887 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
20890 \begin_layout Standard
20892 \begin_inset Graphics
20893 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
20901 \begin_layout Standard
20902 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
20903 the image into a float, see section
20904 \begin_inset space ~
20908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20910 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
20917 \begin_layout Subsection
20919 \begin_inset Index idx
20922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20929 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20931 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
20938 \begin_layout Standard
20939 You can insert images in any known file format.
20940 But as we explained in section
20941 \begin_inset space ~
20945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20947 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20951 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
20953 therefore uses the program
20957 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
20958 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
20959 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
20960 \begin_inset space ~
20964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20966 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20973 \begin_layout Standard
20974 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
20977 \begin_layout Description
20979 \begin_inset space ~
20982 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
20983 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
20984 Well-known bitmap image formats are
20985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20988 Graphics Interchange Format
20989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20992 (GIF, file extension
20993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21005 \begin_inset Index idx
21008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21040 Portable Network Graphics
21041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21044 (PNG, file extension
21045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21057 \begin_inset Index idx
21060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21092 Joint Photographic Experts Group
21093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21096 (JPG, file extension
21097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21121 \begin_inset Index idx
21124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21155 \begin_layout Description
21157 \begin_inset space ~
21160 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
21162 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
21163 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
21164 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
21165 \begin_inset Newline newline
21168 Scalable image formats can be
21169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21172 Scalable Vector Graphics
21173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21176 (SVG, file extension
21177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21189 \begin_inset Index idx
21192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21224 Encapsulated PostScript
21225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21228 (EPS, file extension
21229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21241 \begin_inset Index idx
21244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21276 Portable Document Format
21277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21280 (PDF, file extension
21281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21293 \begin_inset Index idx
21296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21311 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21312 result will not be scalable.
21313 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21319 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21327 \begin_layout Standard
21328 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21335 \begin_layout Subsection
21336 Grouping of Image Settings
21337 \begin_inset Index idx
21340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21341 Images ! Settings grouping
21349 \begin_layout Standard
21350 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21352 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21353 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21355 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21356 need to manually change each of them.
21360 \begin_layout Standard
21361 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21364 \begin_inset space ~
21368 \begin_inset space ~
21380 \begin_inset space ~
21384 \begin_inset space ~
21390 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21391 and checking the name of the desired group.
21394 \begin_layout Section
21396 \begin_inset Index idx
21399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21406 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21415 \begin_layout Standard
21416 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21419 arg "tabular-insert"
21424 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21428 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
21429 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
21430 , and you can select a specific (border) style
21433 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21434 from the rest of the table.
21435 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21436 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21438 Here is an example table:
21441 \begin_layout Standard
21443 \begin_inset Tabular
21444 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21445 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21446 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21447 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21448 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21449 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21647 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
21651 \begin_layout Standard
21653 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
21654 This corresponds to the
21655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21662 table style listed in the style selection.
21665 \begin_layout Standard
21667 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
21668 Other available styles include:
21671 \begin_layout Itemize
21673 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
21675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21682 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
21686 \begin_layout Itemize
21688 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
21689 a border-less table with no lines at all,
21692 \begin_layout Itemize
21694 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
21696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21703 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
21704 bold top/bottom lines (see
21715 \begin_layout Standard
21717 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
21718 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
21719 button can be changed in
21721 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21722 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21726 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
21730 \begin_layout Subsection
21734 \begin_layout Standard
21735 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
21738 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
21742 This brings up the table dialog.
21743 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
21744 cursor is placed currently.
21745 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
21746 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
21747 done on all of your selection.
21750 \begin_layout Standard
21751 In addition to the table dialog, the
21754 \begin_inset space ~
21759 helps you in setting table properties.
21760 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
21763 \begin_layout Standard
21767 \begin_inset space ~
21772 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
21773 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
21774 current cell respectively.
21775 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
21777 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
21778 of text, see section
21779 \begin_inset space ~
21783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21785 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
21792 \begin_layout Standard
21793 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
21794 using the check box
21803 This will merge the cells to
21807 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
21808 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
21809 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
21810 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
21811 in the last row without the upper border:
21814 \begin_layout Standard
21816 \begin_inset Tabular
21817 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
21818 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
21819 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21820 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
21821 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21822 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21833 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21842 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21918 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21953 \begin_layout Standard
21954 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21955 -arguments for the table.
21956 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
21957 explained in the chapter
21964 \begin_inset space ~
21970 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
21971 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
21972 but are visible in the output.
21975 \begin_layout Standard
21976 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21984 Most DVI-viewers are
21988 able to display rotations.
21996 \begin_layout Standard
22001 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
22006 adds lines for all cell borders.
22009 \begin_layout Subsection
22011 \begin_inset Index idx
22014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22015 Tables ! Multi-page
22021 \begin_inset Index idx
22024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22033 \begin_layout Standard
22034 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
22037 \begin_inset space ~
22041 \begin_inset space ~
22049 \begin_inset space ~
22054 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
22055 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
22058 \begin_layout Description
22063 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22064 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
22065 Except for the first page, if
22068 \begin_inset space ~
22076 \begin_layout Description
22080 \begin_inset space ~
22085 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22086 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
22089 \begin_layout Description
22094 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22095 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
22096 except for the last page, if
22099 \begin_inset space ~
22107 \begin_layout Description
22111 \begin_inset space ~
22116 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22117 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
22120 \begin_layout Description
22121 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
22122 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
22124 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22128 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
22131 \begin_inset space ~
22139 \begin_layout Standard
22140 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22141 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
22142 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
22148 In this context, first means first in this order:
22151 \begin_inset space ~
22163 \begin_inset space ~
22168 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
22171 \begin_layout Standard
22173 \begin_inset Tabular
22174 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
22175 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
22176 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
22177 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22178 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22179 <row endfirsthead="true">
22180 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22186 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
22191 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22200 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22210 <row endfirsthead="true">
22211 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22222 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22231 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22243 <row endhead="true">
22244 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22255 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22264 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22274 <row endhead="true">
22275 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22286 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22295 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22307 <row endfoot="true">
22308 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22319 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22328 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22359 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23300 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23309 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23318 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23329 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23360 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23391 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23422 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23453 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23484 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23515 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23546 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23577 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23608 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23639 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23670 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23701 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23732 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23763 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23794 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23825 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23856 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23887 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23918 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23949 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23980 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24011 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24042 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24073 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24104 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24135 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24166 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24197 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24228 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24259 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24289 <row endlastfoot="true">
24290 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24301 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24310 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24327 \begin_layout Subsection
24329 \begin_inset Index idx
24332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24339 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24341 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24348 \begin_layout Standard
24349 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24350 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24351 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24352 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24356 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24359 \begin_layout Standard
24360 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24361 for the column in the table dialog.
24362 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24363 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24367 \begin_layout Standard
24369 \begin_inset Tabular
24370 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24371 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24372 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24373 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24374 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24394 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24463 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24519 This is longer now.
24524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24575 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24576 This is longer now.
24581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24607 \begin_layout Standard
24608 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
24609 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
24613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24614 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
24615 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
24621 Selection with the mouse or with
24625 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
24626 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
24627 the selection from outside the table.
24630 \begin_layout Section
24632 \begin_inset Index idx
24635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24642 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24651 \begin_layout Subsection
24655 \begin_layout Standard
24656 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
24657 have a fixed location.
24659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24666 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
24674 \begin_inset space ~
24679 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
24680 too many notes on the current page.
24683 \begin_layout Standard
24684 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
24685 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
24686 and pages without text.
24687 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
24688 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
24689 Floats are therefore numbered.
24690 Referencing is described in section
24691 \begin_inset space ~
24695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24697 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24704 \begin_layout Standard
24705 To insert a float, use the menu
24707 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24711 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
24712 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
24714 After the label you can insert the caption text.
24715 \begin_inset Index idx
24718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24724 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
24725 paragraph within the float.
24726 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
24727 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
24728 left-clicking on the box label.
24729 A closed float box looks like this:
24730 \begin_inset Graphics
24731 filename clipart/float.png
24736 – a gray button with a red label.
24739 \begin_layout Standard
24740 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
24742 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
24745 \begin_layout Subsection
24747 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24749 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24754 \begin_inset Index idx
24757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24758 Floats ! Figure floats
24766 \begin_layout Standard
24768 \begin_inset space ~
24772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24774 reference "fig:A-star-in"
24778 was created using the menu
24780 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24781 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24787 arg "float-insert figure"
24791 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
24794 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24800 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24804 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
24805 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
24807 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24809 \begin_inset space ~
24817 arg "layout-paragraph"
24823 \begin_layout Standard
24824 \begin_inset Float figure
24831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24833 \begin_inset Graphics
24834 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24844 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24847 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24849 name "fig:A-star-in"
24866 \begin_layout Standard
24867 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
24868 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
24870 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24879 ) and refer to it using the menu
24881 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24887 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24891 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
24892 vague references like
24893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24900 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
24901 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
24903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24911 For more about cross-references, see section
24912 \begin_inset space ~
24916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24918 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24925 \begin_layout Standard
24926 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
24927 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
24928 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
24929 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
24930 as described in section
24931 \begin_inset space ~
24935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24937 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
24943 \begin_inset space ~
24947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24949 reference "fig:Two-images"
24953 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
24954 You can also set the images one below the other.
24956 \begin_inset space ~
24960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24962 reference "fig:Undefinable"
24967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24969 reference "fig:Star"
24973 are the subfigures.
24976 \begin_layout Standard
24977 \begin_inset Float figure
24984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24985 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24989 \begin_inset Float figure
24996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24997 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25000 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25002 name "fig:Undefinable"
25014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25015 \begin_inset Graphics
25016 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
25028 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25032 \begin_inset Float figure
25039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25040 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25043 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25058 \begin_inset Graphics
25059 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25071 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25078 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25081 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25083 name "fig:Two-images"
25100 \begin_layout Subsection
25102 \begin_inset Index idx
25105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25106 Floats ! Table floats
25114 \begin_layout Standard
25115 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
25117 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25118 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25121 or the toolbar button
25124 arg "float-insert table"
25128 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
25129 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
25130 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
25132 \begin_inset space ~
25136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25138 reference "tab:Table-float"
25145 \begin_layout Standard
25146 \begin_inset Float table
25153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25154 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25157 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25159 name "tab:Table-float"
25171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25173 \begin_inset Tabular
25174 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
25175 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25176 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25177 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25178 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25305 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25326 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25329 \end{array}\right]$
25337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25350 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25371 \begin_layout Subsection
25373 \begin_inset Index idx
25376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25385 \begin_layout Standard
25387 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25388 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25389 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25391 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25399 \begin_inset space ~
25407 \begin_layout Section
25409 \begin_inset Index idx
25412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25421 \begin_layout Standard
25423 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25425 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25426 \begin_inset space \space{}
25433 \begin_layout Standard
25434 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25435 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25437 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25441 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25442 and its alignment within the page.
25445 \begin_layout Standard
25447 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25457 height_special "totalheight"
25462 backgroundcolor "none"
25465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25468 This is a minipage.
25469 The text is set in an italic style.
25472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25475 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25476 another formatting.
25484 \begin_layout Standard
25485 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25488 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25492 as described in section
25493 \begin_inset space ~
25497 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25499 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25504 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25510 \begin_layout Standard
25511 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25521 height_special "totalheight"
25526 backgroundcolor "none"
25529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25530 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25531 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25537 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25541 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25551 height_special "totalheight"
25556 backgroundcolor "none"
25559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25560 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25561 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25569 \begin_layout Standard
25570 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25576 \begin_layout Standard
25577 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
25579 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
25586 \begin_inset space ~
25594 \begin_layout Chapter
25595 Mathematical Formulas
25596 \begin_inset Index idx
25599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25606 \begin_inset Index idx
25609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25638 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25640 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
25647 \begin_layout Standard
25648 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
25653 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
25656 \begin_layout Section
25658 \begin_inset Index idx
25661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25670 \begin_layout Standard
25671 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
25684 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
25686 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
25687 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
25688 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
25690 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25696 \begin_layout Standard
25697 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
25701 \begin_inset space ~
25706 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
25709 \begin_layout Standard
25710 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
25711 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
25714 \begin_layout Standard
25715 This is a line with an inline formula
25716 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
25722 \begin_layout Standard
25723 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
25724 paragraph, like this one:
25725 \begin_inset Formula
25732 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
25735 \begin_layout Standard
25737 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
25739 For example, typing
25740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25753 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
25754 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
25758 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
25761 \begin_inset space ~
25769 \begin_layout Subsection
25770 Navigating in Formulas
25771 \begin_inset Index idx
25774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25783 \begin_layout Standard
25784 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
25785 achieved with the arrow keys.
25787 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
25788 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
25793 will leave a formula construct (a square root
25794 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
25798 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
25802 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25805 \end{array}\right]$
25813 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
25818 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
25819 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
25822 \begin_layout Standard
25827 , printed in this document as
25828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25832 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25839 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
25840 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
25841 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
25846 For example, if you want
25847 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
25855 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25865 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25869 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25874 , since in the latter case only the
25877 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
25882 will be under the square root sign:
25883 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
25889 \begin_layout Standard
25890 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
25892 \begin_inset Formula
25894 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25903 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
25904 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
25907 \begin_layout Subsection
25911 \begin_layout Standard
25912 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
25913 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
25917 and a cursor movement key to select text.
25918 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
25919 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
25920 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
25921 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
25925 \begin_layout Subsection
25926 Exponents and Subscripts
25927 \begin_inset Index idx
25930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25937 \begin_inset Index idx
25940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25949 \begin_layout Standard
25950 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
25953 arg "math-superscript"
25959 arg "math-subscript"
25962 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
25964 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
25967 , type in a formula
25970 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25980 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
25986 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
25990 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
25996 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26002 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
26004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26011 , you have to use an extra
26015 to separate the circumflex and the character.
26016 For example, if you want
26017 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
26023 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26029 Subscripts are similar: To get
26030 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
26036 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26044 \begin_layout Subsection
26046 \begin_inset Index idx
26049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26058 \begin_layout Standard
26059 Create a fraction either with the command
26065 or by using the icon
26068 arg "math-insert \\frac"
26074 \begin_inset space ~
26080 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
26081 The cursor is above the fraction line.
26082 To move it to the bottom, simply press
26087 To move back up, press
26092 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
26093 \begin_inset Formula
26095 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
26098 \end{array}\right)}\right]
26106 \begin_layout Subsection
26108 \begin_inset Index idx
26111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26120 \begin_layout Standard
26121 Roots can be created using the
26124 \begin_inset space ~
26132 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26138 arg "math-insert \\root"
26160 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
26166 always produces a square root.
26169 \begin_layout Subsection
26170 Operators with Limits
26171 \begin_inset Index idx
26174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26181 \begin_inset Index idx
26184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26191 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26193 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26200 \begin_layout Standard
26202 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
26206 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
26209 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
26210 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26211 by entering them as you would enter a super-
26212 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
26213 The sum operator will automatically place its
26214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26221 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
26223 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
26227 \begin_inset Formula
26229 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
26234 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
26238 \begin_layout Standard
26239 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
26241 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
26242 behind the operator and using the menu
26244 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26245 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26247 \begin_inset space ~
26251 \begin_inset space ~
26265 \begin_layout Standard
26266 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
26267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26275 \begin_inset Index idx
26278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26285 \begin_inset Formula
26287 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
26292 which will place the
26293 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
26297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26305 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26306 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26312 \begin_layout Standard
26313 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26320 Have a look at section
26321 \begin_inset space ~
26325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26327 reference "subsec:Functions"
26331 for an explanation of function macros.
26334 \begin_layout Subsection
26336 \begin_inset Index idx
26339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26348 \begin_layout Standard
26349 Most math symbols can be found in the
26352 \begin_inset space ~
26357 under one of several categories; including
26374 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26378 \begin_layout Standard
26379 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26380 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26381 don't have to use the
26384 \begin_inset space ~
26389 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26391 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26394 \begin_layout Subsection
26396 \begin_inset Index idx
26399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26408 \begin_layout Standard
26409 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26415 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26421 \begin_inset space ~
26429 arg "math-insert \\space"
26433 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26434 For example, the sequence
26439 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26442 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26444 \begin_inset Graphics
26445 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26450 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26451 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26452 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26453 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26454 , because they are negative
26456 Here are two examples:
26459 \begin_layout Standard
26469 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26475 \begin_layout Standard
26485 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26491 \begin_layout Subsection
26493 \begin_inset Index idx
26496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26503 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26505 name "subsec:Functions"
26512 \begin_layout Standard
26516 \begin_inset space ~
26521 contains under the button
26524 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26527 a number of function macros, such as
26528 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26532 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26540 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
26547 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
26548 avoid confusions, because
26549 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
26553 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
26559 \begin_layout Standard
26560 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
26562 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
26566 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
26572 \begin_layout Standard
26573 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
26574 are placed, as described in section
26575 \begin_inset space ~
26579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26581 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26588 \begin_layout Subsection
26590 \begin_inset Index idx
26593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26602 \begin_layout Standard
26603 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
26605 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
26606 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
26607 commands, for example, to enter
26608 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26611 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
26612 Our example is entered by typing
26617 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26624 \begin_inset space ~
26628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26630 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
26634 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
26637 \begin_layout Standard
26638 \begin_inset Float table
26645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26646 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26649 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26651 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
26655 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
26663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26665 \begin_inset Tabular
26666 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
26667 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26668 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26669 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26670 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26754 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26808 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
26818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26862 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
26872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26916 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
26926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26970 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
26980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27024 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
27034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27078 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
27088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27132 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27186 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
27196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27231 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
27252 \begin_layout Standard
27253 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
27256 \begin_inset space ~
27264 arg "math-insert \\hat"
27267 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
27271 \begin_layout Section
27272 Brackets and Delimiters
27273 \begin_inset Index idx
27276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27283 \begin_inset Index idx
27286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27293 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27295 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27302 \begin_layout Standard
27303 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
27305 For some purposes, using just the keys
27310 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
27311 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
27312 toolbar delimiter icon
27315 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27319 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
27320 \begin_inset Formula
27322 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27330 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27331 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27335 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27338 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27344 \begin_inset Formula
27346 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27354 \begin_layout Standard
27355 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27356 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27360 \begin_layout Standard
27361 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27362 left side and right side.
27363 If you use the option
27366 \begin_inset space ~
27371 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27372 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27374 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27379 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27380 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27383 \begin_layout Standard
27384 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27385 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27386 is to go inside the brackets.
27387 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27392 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27393 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27394 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27398 arg "math-delim ( )"
27404 \begin_layout Section
27405 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27406 \begin_inset Index idx
27409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27416 \begin_inset Index idx
27419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27426 \begin_inset Index idx
27429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27430 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27438 \begin_layout Standard
27439 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27443 \begin_inset space ~
27451 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27455 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27456 Here is an example:
27457 \begin_inset Formula
27459 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27468 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27469 \begin_inset space ~
27473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27475 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27480 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27481 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27482 This alignment is set in the box
27487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27536 for every column as default.
27537 For example, the sequence
27538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27549 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
27550 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
27551 corresponds to the relevant column.
27552 The result will look like this:
27553 \begin_inset Formula
27556 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
27557 column & has & has\,right\\
27558 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
27567 \begin_layout Standard
27568 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
27571 arg "newline-insert newline"
27574 while the cursor is in the matrix.
27575 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
27577 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27580 or the math toolbar.
27583 \begin_layout Standard
27584 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
27585 It can be created with the menu
27587 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27588 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27590 \begin_inset space ~
27602 Here is an example:
27603 \begin_inset Formula
27617 \begin_layout Standard
27618 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27621 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
27624 arg "newline-insert newline"
27628 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
27633 arg "newline-insert newline"
27636 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
27637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27644 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
27645 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
27646 A new row is created by every further entry of
27649 arg "newline-insert newline"
27653 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
27654 Here is an example:
27655 \begin_inset Formula
27657 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
27658 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
27663 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
27664 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
27665 \begin_inset Formula
27667 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
27675 \begin_layout Standard
27676 The multi-line formula type described here is called
27683 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
27684 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
27685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27687 reference "eq:asquared"
27692 The other types are described in section
27693 \begin_inset space ~
27697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27699 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27706 \begin_layout Section
27707 Formula Numbering and Referencing
27708 \begin_inset Index idx
27711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27712 Math ! Formula numbering
27718 \begin_inset Index idx
27721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27722 Math ! Referencing formulas
27728 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27730 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27737 \begin_layout Standard
27738 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
27740 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27741 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27743 \begin_inset space ~
27747 \begin_inset space ~
27755 arg "math-number-toggle"
27759 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27760 within parentheses.
27761 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
27762 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
27763 the document class.
27764 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
27765 separated by a dot:
27766 \begin_inset Formula
27776 arg "math-number-toggle"
27779 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
27780 You can only number displayed formulas.
27783 \begin_layout Standard
27784 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
27786 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27787 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27789 \begin_inset space ~
27793 \begin_inset space ~
27801 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
27804 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
27805 \begin_inset Formula
27808 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
27814 To number all lines use the shortcut
27817 arg "math-number-toggle"
27823 \begin_layout Standard
27824 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27827 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
27828 A label is inserted with the menu
27830 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27839 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
27840 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
27841 It is recommended that you use the suggested
27842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27853 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
27854 label type when you have many labels in your document.
27855 We inserted in the following example the label
27856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27863 in the second line:
27864 \begin_inset Formula
27866 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
27867 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
27872 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
27873 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
27874 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
27876 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27878 \begin_inset space ~
27886 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27890 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
27891 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27892 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
27893 as the formula number:
27896 \begin_layout Standard
27897 This is a cross-reference to equation (
27898 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27900 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27907 \begin_layout Standard
27908 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
27909 's cross-reference box are described in section
27910 \begin_inset space ~
27914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27916 reference "sec:Cross-References"
27921 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
27929 \begin_layout Section
27930 User defined math macros
27931 \begin_inset Index idx
27934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27943 \begin_layout Standard
27945 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
27946 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
27947 Math macros are explained in section
27950 \begin_inset space ~
27962 \begin_layout Section
27966 \begin_layout Subsection
27968 \begin_inset Index idx
27971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27980 \begin_layout Standard
27981 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
27982 To set a font in a formula, use the
27985 \begin_inset space ~
27993 arg "math-insert \\font"
27996 , or enter its command, listed in table
27997 \begin_inset space ~
28001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28003 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28010 \begin_layout Standard
28011 \begin_inset Float table
28018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28019 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28022 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28024 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28028 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
28036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28038 \begin_inset Tabular
28039 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
28040 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28041 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28042 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28074 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
28082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28101 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
28109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28128 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
28136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28161 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
28169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28188 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
28196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28215 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
28223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28249 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
28257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28276 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
28284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28310 \begin_layout Standard
28311 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28319 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
28335 \begin_layout Standard
28336 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
28337 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
28342 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
28343 space when you need a space in the box.
28344 Here is an example where
28345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28356 denotes the set of numbers:
28357 \begin_inset Formula
28359 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28367 \begin_layout Standard
28368 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
28369 You can, for example, put a character in
28378 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
28382 \begin_inset Newline newline
28385 So it is better not to use this feature.
28388 \begin_layout Standard
28389 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28390 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28394 \begin_inset Newline newline
28397 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28403 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28404 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28410 \begin_layout Standard
28417 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28420 \begin_layout Standard
28421 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28423 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28424 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28426 \begin_inset space ~
28434 \begin_layout Subsection
28436 \begin_inset Index idx
28439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28448 \begin_layout Standard
28449 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
28451 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
28455 \begin_inset space ~
28459 \begin_inset space ~
28467 \begin_inset space ~
28475 arg "math-insert \\font"
28479 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28480 in black instead of blue.
28481 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
28482 Here is an example:
28483 \begin_inset Formula
28486 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
28487 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
28496 \begin_layout Subsection
28498 \begin_inset Index idx
28501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28510 \begin_layout Standard
28511 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
28512 automatically chosen in most situations.
28530 For most characters,
28538 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
28539 and certain other structures, are set larger in
28544 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
28545 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
28546 thinks are appropriate.
28547 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
28550 arg "math-insert \\style"
28554 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
28555 For example, you can set
28556 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
28559 , which is normally in
28568 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
28572 The four styles are used in the following example:
28575 \begin_layout Standard
28576 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
28580 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
28584 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
28588 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
28594 \begin_layout Standard
28595 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
28596 is set in a particular size with the menu
28598 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28600 \begin_inset space ~
28605 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
28606 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
28607 will be adjusted to correspond.
28608 As an example here is a formula in the font size
28609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28619 \begin_layout Standard
28623 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
28629 \begin_layout Section
28630 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28632 \begin_inset Index idx
28635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28642 \begin_inset Index idx
28645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28654 \begin_layout Standard
28656 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
28657 that are in common use.
28660 \begin_layout Subsection
28661 Enabling AMS-Support
28664 \begin_layout Standard
28665 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
28666 the document by selecting the checkbox
28669 \begin_inset space ~
28673 \begin_inset space ~
28677 \begin_inset space ~
28684 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28688 \begin_inset Index idx
28691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28692 Document ! Settings
28700 \begin_inset space ~
28706 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28707 -errors in formulas,
28708 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
28711 \begin_layout Subsection
28713 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28715 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28720 \begin_inset Index idx
28723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28724 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28732 \begin_layout Standard
28733 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28734 provides a selection of different formula types.
28736 allows you to choose between
28757 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
28758 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28765 , for an explanation of these formula types.
28768 \begin_layout Chapter
28772 \begin_layout Section
28774 \begin_inset Index idx
28777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28784 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28786 name "sec:Cross-References"
28793 \begin_layout Standard
28794 One of \SpecialChar LyX
28795 's strengths is cross-references.
28796 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
28798 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
28799 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
28800 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
28803 \begin_layout Enumerate
28807 \begin_layout Enumerate
28808 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28810 name "enu:Second-item"
28817 \begin_layout Enumerate
28821 \begin_layout Standard
28822 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
28824 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28827 or by pressing the toolbar button
28834 A gray label box like this:
28835 \begin_inset Graphics
28836 filename clipart/label.png
28840 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
28842 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
28844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28877 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
28878 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
28880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28894 \begin_layout Standard
28895 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
28897 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28900 or the toolbar button
28903 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28907 A gray cross-reference box like this:
28908 \begin_inset Graphics
28909 filename clipart/reference.png
28913 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
28915 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
28916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28928 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
28932 \begin_layout Standard
28933 As an alternative to
28935 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28938 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
28943 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
28944 to the actual cursor position via the menu
28946 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28958 \begin_layout Standard
28959 Here is our cross-reference: Item
28960 \begin_inset space ~
28964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28966 reference "enu:Second-item"
28973 \begin_layout Standard
28974 It is recommended to use a protected space
28978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28979 described in section
28980 \begin_inset space ~
28984 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28986 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
28995 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
28996 line breaks between them.
28999 \begin_layout Standard
29000 There are eight formats of cross-references:
29003 \begin_layout Description
29004 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
29005 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29007 reference "fig:Two-images"
29014 \begin_layout Description
29015 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
29016 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
29018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29028 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29035 \begin_layout Description
29036 <page>: prints the page number: Page
29037 \begin_inset space ~
29041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29042 LatexCommand pageref
29043 reference "fig:Two-images"
29050 \begin_layout Description
29052 \begin_inset space ~
29056 \begin_inset space ~
29059 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
29060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29061 LatexCommand vpageref
29062 reference "fig:Two-images"
29067 \begin_inset Newline newline
29070 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
29071 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
29072 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
29073 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
29074 it prints “on the next page”.
29075 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
29078 \begin_layout Description
29080 \begin_inset space ~
29084 \begin_inset space ~
29088 \begin_inset space ~
29091 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
29092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29094 reference "fig:Two-images"
29099 \begin_inset Newline newline
29102 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
29108 ; otherwise it behaves like
29112 \begin_inset space ~
29116 \begin_inset space ~
29125 \begin_layout Description
29127 \begin_inset space ~
29130 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
29131 \begin_inset Newline newline
29135 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29143 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29153 \begin_inset Index idx
29156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29158 packages ! prettyref
29164 \begin_inset Index idx
29167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29169 packages ! refstyle
29180 \begin_inset Newline newline
29183 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
29184 -package should be used for this feature by setting
29187 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
29191 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29192 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29200 is the default and preferred because
29204 supports only English documents.
29205 The format is specified by using the command
29217 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29218 preamble of the document.
29219 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
29221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29237 \begin_inset Newline newline
29244 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
29249 \begin_inset Newline newline
29260 predefines reference formats for all available types.
29261 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
29263 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
29264 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
29269 , you might do so as follows:
29270 \begin_inset Newline newline
29277 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
29282 \begin_inset Newline newline
29285 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
29286 the package documentation
29287 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29289 key "prettyref,refstyle"
29295 \begin_inset Newline newline
29306 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
29313 \begin_layout Description
29315 \begin_inset space ~
29318 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
29319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29320 LatexCommand nameref
29321 reference "fig:Two-images"
29328 \begin_layout Description
29330 \begin_inset space ~
29333 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29334 label for the reference:
29335 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29336 LatexCommand labelonly
29337 reference "fig:Two-images"
29342 \begin_inset Newline newline
29345 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
29346 Code, if you want to issue a command
29347 that \SpecialChar LyX
29353 , then you may want to use the
29356 \begin_inset space ~
29361 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
29363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29371 This is the form needed for e.
29372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29376 \begin_inset space \space{}
29383 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
29384 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
29386 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29390 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29394 \begin_layout Standard
29395 You can only use the style
29399 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29403 is always possible.
29406 \begin_layout Standard
29407 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
29408 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
29410 Referencing formulas is explained in section
29411 \begin_inset space ~
29415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29417 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29424 \begin_layout Standard
29425 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
29429 \begin_inset space ~
29433 \begin_inset space ~
29438 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
29439 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
29442 \begin_inset space ~
29447 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
29448 You can also go back with the toolbar button
29451 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
29457 \begin_layout Standard
29458 You can change labels at any time.
29459 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
29460 do not need to think about this.
29463 \begin_layout Standard
29464 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
29466 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
29470 \begin_layout Standard
29471 References are described in detail in the section
29472 \begin_inset space ~
29482 \begin_inset space ~
29490 \begin_layout Section
29491 Table of Contents and other Listings
29492 \begin_inset Index idx
29495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29502 \begin_inset Index idx
29505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29506 Navigating ! Outline
29512 \begin_inset Index idx
29515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29522 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29531 \begin_layout Subsection
29533 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29535 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
29542 \begin_layout Standard
29543 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
29545 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29546 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
29548 \begin_inset space ~
29552 \begin_inset space ~
29558 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
29560 If you click on it, the
29564 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
29565 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
29566 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
29568 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
29570 \begin_inset space ~
29575 that is described in section
29576 \begin_inset space ~
29580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29582 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
29589 \begin_layout Standard
29590 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
29591 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
29593 \begin_inset space ~
29597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29599 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
29603 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
29605 \begin_inset space ~
29609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29611 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
29615 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
29617 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
29620 \begin_layout Subsection
29621 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
29622 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29624 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
29631 \begin_layout Standard
29632 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
29634 You can insert them via the
29636 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29637 List/Contents/References
29640 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
29643 \begin_layout Section
29644 URLs and Hyperlinks
29645 \begin_inset Index idx
29648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29655 \begin_inset Index idx
29658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29667 \begin_layout Subsection
29669 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29678 \begin_layout Standard
29679 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
29681 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29687 \begin_layout Standard
29688 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
29690 \begin_inset Flex URL
29693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29695 https://www.lyx.org
29703 \begin_layout Standard
29704 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
29710 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
29714 \begin_layout Standard
29715 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29723 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29732 \begin_layout Subsection
29734 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29736 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
29743 \begin_layout Standard
29744 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
29746 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29749 or with the toolbar button
29756 The appearing dialog has two fields:
29765 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
29766 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
29767 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29769 name "LyX's homepage"
29770 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29775 , an Email address like this:
29776 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29778 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
29779 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
29785 , or a link to a file.
29790 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29798 \begin_layout Standard
29799 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
29801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29812 to the link target.
29815 \begin_layout Standard
29816 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
29817 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
29818 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
29819 the text style dialog.
29820 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
29824 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29826 name "LyX's homepage"
29827 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29835 \begin_layout Standard
29836 The link text color can be changed, when the option
29840 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
29842 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29843 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29847 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
29849 \begin_inset Newline newline
29857 \begin_inset Newline newline
29864 in the PDF Properties dialog.
29865 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
29869 \begin_layout Section
29871 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
29873 \begin_inset Index idx
29876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29883 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29885 name "sec:Counters"
29892 \begin_layout Standard
29894 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374084
29895 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
29896 is its ability to manage counters.
29897 Mostly, this is handled automatically, but there are times one wants to
29898 modify counters directly.
29899 This can be done in LyX using the counter inset, which is accessible from
29901 This allows one to set a counter's value; to reset it (to zero); to add
29902 to the value (or subtract from it, since the value added can be negative);
29903 to save it; to restore the saved value; and to print the value.
29904 These effects can also be limited to LyX itself.
29905 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output, as well as in LaTeX.
29909 \begin_layout Standard
29911 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
29912 There are five commands you can use:
29915 \begin_layout Enumerate
29917 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
29918 Set counter: Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
29921 \begin_layout Enumerate
29923 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
29924 Increase counter: Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or
29925 to subtract, if you choose a negative number)
29928 \begin_layout Enumerate
29930 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
29931 Reset to zero: Sets the value of the counter to 0.
29934 \begin_layout Enumerate
29936 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
29937 Save value of counter: Saves the value of the counter so that it can later
29941 \begin_layout Enumerate
29943 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
29944 Restore value of counter: Restores the previously saved value.
29947 \begin_layout Standard
29949 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
29950 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all
29951 those that are available in the current document class.
29956 \begin_layout Section
29958 \begin_inset Index idx
29961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29968 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29970 name "sec:Appendices"
29977 \begin_layout Standard
29978 Appendices are created with the menu
29980 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29982 \begin_inset space ~
29986 \begin_inset space ~
29992 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
29993 as the appendix part of the book.
29994 This part is marked with a red borderline.
29997 \begin_layout Standard
29998 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
29999 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
30000 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
30001 and the subsection number.
30002 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
30006 \begin_layout Standard
30008 \begin_inset space ~
30012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30014 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
30022 \begin_inset space ~
30026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30028 reference "subsec:Export"
30035 \begin_layout Section
30037 \begin_inset Index idx
30040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30047 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30049 name "sec:Bibliography"
30056 \begin_layout Standard
30057 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
30059 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
30060 \begin_inset space ~
30064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30066 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30073 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
30078 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
30079 \begin_inset space ~
30083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30085 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
30090 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
30091 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
30092 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
30096 using a bibliography database.
30099 \begin_layout Standard
30100 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
30101 use two bibliographies in this document, a
30105 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
30106 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
30107 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
30108 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
30109 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
30112 \begin_layout Subsection
30113 The Bibliography Environment
30114 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30116 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30123 \begin_layout Standard
30128 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
30130 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
30139 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
30141 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
30142 of ASCII characters only.
30146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30148 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30151 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
30157 \begin_inset Newline newline
30161 \begin_inset Flex URL
30164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30166 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
30176 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30186 , a short form of its title, as the key.
30187 \begin_inset Newline newline
30194 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
30195 the number of the entry.
30200 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30209 \begin_layout Standard
30210 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
30212 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30215 or the toolbar button
30218 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
30222 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
30223 containing the available citations.
30224 Select one or more keys from the list and
30234 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
30235 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
30239 \begin_layout Standard
30240 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
30241 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
30242 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
30244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30254 \begin_layout Standard
30258 Companion Second Edition
30261 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30263 key "latexcompanion"
30271 \begin_layout Standard
30272 The \SpecialChar LyX
30273 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
30274 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30284 \begin_layout Standard
30285 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30292 \begin_inset Index idx
30295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30304 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
30305 the label needs to be given the form
30306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30317 Author A and Author B(Year)
30318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30325 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
30332 \begin_inset space ~
30337 in the document settings
30338 \begin_inset Index idx
30341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30342 Document ! Settings
30349 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
30351 \begin_inset space ~
30357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30359 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
30367 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
30369 Once you have done that, the
30373 dialog has three input fields instead of the
30390 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
30391 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
30392 These two are madatory.
30393 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
30396 Baker, Jones, and Williams
30398 ) and in abrreviated form (
30405 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
30406 add the abbreviated form to
30410 and the full list to the optional
30418 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
30419 If specified like this,
30421 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
30422 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
30425 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30432 is specified, toggling
30433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30440 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
30441 full and abbreviated list
30445 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
30446 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
30447 the citation references.
30448 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
30453 \begin_layout Standard
30454 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
30457 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30459 \begin_inset space ~
30467 arg "layout-paragraph"
30471 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
30474 \begin_layout Subsection
30475 Bibliography databases
30476 \begin_inset Index idx
30479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30480 Bibliography ! Databases
30486 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30488 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30495 \begin_layout Standard
30496 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
30501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30502 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
30504 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
30505 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
30510 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
30512 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
30513 your working field in a database.
30514 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
30515 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
30516 list for that document.
30517 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
30521 \begin_layout Standard
30522 The database is a text file with the file extension
30523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30534 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
30535 The format is explained in
30536 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30543 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30545 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30547 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
30553 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
30554 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
30555 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
30557 \begin_inset Flex URL
30560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30562 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
30570 \begin_layout Standard
30572 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
30573 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30574 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
30576 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
30578 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
30579 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
30580 Those are addressed by
30585 \begin_inset Index idx
30588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30590 packages ! biblatex
30596 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30597 (although it has been significantly
30598 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30608 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30609 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30610 might conversely fail to correctly
30611 handle databases that use specific
30620 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
30624 \begin_layout Standard
30625 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30630 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
30632 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30636 \begin_inset Index idx
30639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30640 Document ! Settings
30652 \begin_inset space ~
30657 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30665 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30666 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30668 \begin_inset Index idx
30671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30672 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30681 \begin_layout Standard
30682 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30685 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30686 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30688 \begin_inset space ~
30694 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
30695 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30703 Add bibliography to TOC
30705 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
30710 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
30711 in the document or just the cited references.
30713 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
30718 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
30719 differ from the encoding of the document.
30724 \begin_layout Standard
30725 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30726 style file is a text file with the file extension
30727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30738 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
30739 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30740 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
30741 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
30743 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
30748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30749 For information on how this is done, have a look at
30750 \begin_inset Newline newline
30754 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30756 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
30766 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30771 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
30775 \begin_layout Standard
30776 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
30779 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30781 \begin_inset Index idx
30784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30785 Bibliography ! Biblatex
30791 \begin_inset Index idx
30794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30796 packages ! biblatex
30804 \begin_layout Standard
30805 Accessing a database via
30809 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30812 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30813 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30815 \begin_inset space ~
30821 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30822 you cannot select a
30827 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
30831 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30834 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
30835 As for the styles, note the following.
30840 \begin_layout Standard
30845 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
30847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30858 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
30859 file (text file with the file extension
30860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30871 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
30872 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
30874 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
30878 \begin_layout Standard
30883 styles are not set in the
30886 \begin_inset space ~
30891 dialog, but in the document settings.
30892 \begin_inset Index idx
30895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30896 Document ! Settings
30901 However, in the dialog in the
30905 field, which is only visible if you use
30909 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
30910 example how its heading will appear).
30911 These options are described in detail in the
30916 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30926 \begin_layout Standard
30927 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
30928 \begin_inset space ~
30932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30934 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30944 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30945 Bibliography Processors
30948 \begin_layout Standard
30949 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
30950 uses a bibliography processor,
30951 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
30952 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
30953 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30955 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
30956 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
30959 \begin_layout Standard
30960 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
30962 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
30963 You can do this on a general level in
30965 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30966 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30967 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30970 or for individual documents in
30972 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30973 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30977 The following variants are available by default:
30980 \begin_layout Description
30981 biber a specific, modern processor
30982 \begin_inset Index idx
30985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30992 developed exclusively for
30996 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31002 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
31007 makes use of; if you use the
31011 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
31018 \begin_layout Description
31019 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
31020 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
31021 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
31025 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
31028 \begin_layout Description
31029 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
31030 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
31034 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
31038 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
31042 features are supported.
31045 \begin_layout Standard
31046 By default (with the
31052 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31053 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31066 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31067 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31068 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31071 ), \SpecialChar LyX
31072 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
31085 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31086 -based bibliography styles).
31087 This should suit most needs.
31090 \begin_layout Standard
31091 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
31092 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
31093 (in \SpecialChar LyX
31098 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31099 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
31100 You can adjust it in
31102 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31103 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31104 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31110 \begin_layout Standard
31111 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
31112 can add below the selection.
31113 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
31114 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31120 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31130 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31134 \begin_layout Standard
31136 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
31138 These are explained in detail in section
31140 Customizing Bibliographies
31144 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31149 Additional Features
31154 \begin_layout Subsection
31156 \begin_inset Index idx
31159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31160 Bibliography ! Citation format
31166 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31168 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
31175 \begin_layout Standard
31176 Many different citation formats are common, e.
31177 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31181 \begin_inset space \space{}
31184 numerical citation (as
31185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31192 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
31193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31200 ) or author-year citations (as
31201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31210 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
31214 \begin_layout Standard
31215 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
31218 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31219 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31223 \begin_inset Index idx
31226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31227 Document ! Settings
31232 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
31238 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
31239 labels, is there to use
31242 \begin_inset space ~
31253 \begin_inset space ~
31258 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
31259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31261 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31268 \begin_layout Standard
31269 With a bibliography database (see
31270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31272 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31279 ) one has in contrary to the
31283 environment full access to the formatting styles.
31284 These style formats are available:
31287 \begin_layout Description
31289 \begin_inset space ~
31292 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31293 -based approached without any additional packages
31294 (simple numeric citations).
31297 \begin_layout Description
31298 Biblatex loads the package
31303 \begin_inset Index idx
31306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31308 packages ! biblatex
31313 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
31315 Biblatex citation style
31319 Biblatex bibliography style
31322 Options to the package
31326 can be entered in the
31333 \begin_layout Description
31335 \begin_inset space ~
31339 \begin_inset space ~
31342 mode) loads the package
31346 with the natbib compatibility mode.
31347 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
31359 behavior very closely.
31364 this option has some additional styles.
31369 styles are also supported by this variant.
31372 \begin_layout Description
31374 \begin_inset space ~
31377 (BibTeX) loads the package
31382 \begin_inset Index idx
31385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31392 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
31395 \begin_layout Description
31397 \begin_inset space ~
31400 (BibTeX) loads the package
31405 \begin_inset Index idx
31408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31415 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
31418 \begin_layout Standard
31427 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
31429 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
31438 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
31440 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
31441 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
31443 Biblatex citation style
31446 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
31452 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
31456 \begin_layout Standard
31457 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
31458 are available in the
31463 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
31464 a name prefix such as
31465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31480 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
31481 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31485 \begin_inset space \space{}
31489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31500 \begin_layout Standard
31501 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
31503 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31507 \begin_inset space \space{}
31510 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
31512 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31516 \begin_inset space \space{}
31520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31532 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31536 \begin_inset space ~
31544 \begin_inset space ~
31550 Here is a simple example where the text
31551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31555 \begin_inset space ~
31559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31562 appears after the reference:
31565 \begin_layout Quote
31567 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31570 key "latexcompanion"
31578 \begin_layout Standard
31579 All styles except for
31583 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
31585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31593 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
31597 \begin_layout Standard
31598 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
31599 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
31600 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
31605 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
31606 multi-citation (so-called
31607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31610 qualified citation lists
31611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31617 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
31622 dialog will display three columns in the field
31629 \begin_inset space ~
31637 \begin_inset space ~
31645 \begin_inset space ~
31651 If you double-click on an item's
31654 \begin_inset space ~
31662 \begin_inset space ~
31667 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
31670 General text before
31676 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
31679 \begin_layout Section
31681 \begin_inset Index idx
31684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31691 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31700 \begin_layout Standard
31701 An index entry is created if you use the menu
31703 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31705 \begin_inset space ~
31710 or the toolbar button
31717 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
31718 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
31719 by \SpecialChar LyX
31720 as the index entry.
31723 \begin_layout Standard
31724 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
31726 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31727 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31729 \begin_inset space ~
31735 A light blue box labeled
31736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31747 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
31748 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
31752 \begin_layout Standard
31753 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
31754 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31755 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
31756 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31758 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31760 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
31768 \begin_layout Subsection
31769 Grouping Index Entries
31770 \begin_inset Index idx
31773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31782 \begin_layout Standard
31783 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
31785 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
31786 lists under the entry
31787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31795 First we create the entry
31796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31804 \begin_inset space ~
31808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31810 reference "subsec:Lists"
31815 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
31816 \begin_inset space ~
31820 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31822 reference "sec:Itemize"
31826 , we insert the command
31829 \begin_layout Standard
31835 \begin_layout Standard
31839 \begin_layout Standard
31845 \begin_layout Standard
31846 for the enumerated list in section
31847 \begin_inset space ~
31851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31853 reference "sec:Enumerate"
31860 \begin_layout Standard
31861 The exclamation mark
31862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31869 marks the grouping levels.
31870 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
31871 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
31872 If we don't have an index entry for
31873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31880 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
31883 \begin_layout Subsection
31885 \begin_inset Index idx
31888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31889 Index ! Page ranges
31897 \begin_layout Standard
31898 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
31900 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
31901 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
31902 an index entry in section
31903 \begin_inset space ~
31907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31909 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
31916 \begin_layout Standard
31919 Paragraph environments|(
31922 \begin_layout Standard
31923 and another entry at the end of section
31924 \begin_inset space ~
31928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31930 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
31937 \begin_layout Standard
31940 Paragraph environments|)
31943 \begin_layout Standard
31945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31968 respectively start and end the index range.
31969 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
31970 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
31971 the pages of the indexed document parts.
31972 An example is the index entry
31973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31976 Document ! Settings
31977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31983 \begin_layout Subsection
31985 \begin_inset Index idx
31988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31989 Index ! Cross referencing
31997 \begin_layout Standard
31998 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
31999 We referred for example in the index entry
32000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32008 \begin_inset space ~
32012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32014 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
32018 ) to the index entry
32019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32026 in the same section using the entry
32029 \begin_layout Standard
32032 GIF|see{Image formats}
32035 \begin_layout Standard
32036 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
32038 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
32039 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
32042 \begin_layout Subsection
32044 \begin_inset Index idx
32047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32048 Index ! Entry order
32056 \begin_layout Standard
32057 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
32058 follow the rules for the index order.
32059 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
32064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32065 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
32067 \begin_inset space ~
32071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32073 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32082 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
32083 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
32084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32108 \begin_inset Index idx
32111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32112 Dummy entries ! maïs
32118 \begin_inset Index idx
32121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32122 Dummy entries ! maître
32128 \begin_inset Index idx
32131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32132 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
32137 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
32138 maïs, maison, maître.
32139 To achieve this, we use the command
32142 \begin_layout Standard
32145 previous entry@current entry
32148 \begin_layout Standard
32149 In our case we want to have
32150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32165 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
32168 \begin_layout Standard
32174 \begin_layout Standard
32175 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
32176 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
32178 See the next subsection for an example.
32181 \begin_layout Subsection
32183 \begin_inset Index idx
32186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32187 Index ! Entry layout
32195 \begin_layout Standard
32196 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
32197 \begin_inset Index idx
32200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32203 This is an italic dummy entry
32208 You can also format the page number using the character
32209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32216 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32217 -command without a backslash.
32218 We can write for example
32221 \begin_layout Standard
32224 italic page number:|textit
32227 \begin_layout Standard
32228 to get the page number in italic.
32229 \begin_inset Index idx
32232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32233 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
32238 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
32239 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
32241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32257 \begin_inset space ~
32263 Have a look at section
32264 \begin_inset space ~
32268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32270 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32274 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32278 \begin_layout Standard
32279 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32287 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
32291 to generate the index, see section
32292 \begin_inset space ~
32296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32298 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32307 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
32312 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
32313 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32316 key "latexcompanion"
32329 \begin_layout Standard
32330 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
32332 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
32333 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
32334 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
32335 If so, put the following in the preamble
32338 \begin_layout Standard
32350 \begin_layout Standard
32354 \begin_layout Standard
32360 \begin_layout Standard
32361 in the index entry.
32362 \begin_inset Index idx
32365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32366 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
32371 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
32372 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
32373 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
32376 \begin_layout Standard
32377 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
32378 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
32379 a bold font for all index entries.
32380 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
32392 documentation for details,
32393 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32395 key "makeindex,xindy"
32403 \begin_layout Subsection
32405 \begin_inset Index idx
32408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32415 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32417 name "subsec:Index-Program"
32424 \begin_layout Standard
32425 If the index generation program
32429 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
32430 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
32434 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32435 distribution, is used.
32439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32444 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
32445 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
32446 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
32447 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
32448 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
32458 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
32460 dialog, see section
32461 \begin_inset space ~
32465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32467 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32472 The available options are listed and explained in
32473 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32475 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
32481 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
32485 \begin_layout Standard
32486 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
32487 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
32490 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32491 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32495 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
32496 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
32499 \begin_layout Subsection
32503 \begin_layout Standard
32504 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
32505 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
32506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32513 next to the standard index.
32515 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
32516 that add this feature.
32523 \begin_inset Index idx
32526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32528 packages ! splitidx
32533 package to generate multiple indexes.
32534 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
32539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32540 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
32542 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32550 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32551 style, but it also includes
32552 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
32553 Please consult the package's manual for details.
32561 \begin_layout Standard
32562 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
32563 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
32565 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32566 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32569 and select the option
32571 Use multiple Indexes
32578 already contains the standard index
32579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32587 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
32588 also appear as a heading) to the
32592 input field and press the
32597 The new index now also appears in the list.
32598 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
32599 label color to the new index.
32602 \begin_layout Standard
32603 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
32606 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32607 List/Contents/References
32613 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
32614 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
32615 are additional features:
32618 \begin_layout Itemize
32619 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
32620 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
32623 \begin_layout Itemize
32624 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
32625 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
32630 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
32631 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
32632 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
32633 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
32636 \begin_layout Itemize
32641 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
32642 code in the name of the index.
32645 \begin_layout Section
32646 Nomenclature/Glossary
32647 \begin_inset Index idx
32650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32657 \begin_inset Index idx
32660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32689 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32691 name "sec:Nomenclature"
32698 \begin_layout Standard
32699 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
32700 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
32701 called nomenclature or glossary.
32704 \begin_layout Standard
32705 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32712 \begin_inset Index idx
32715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32723 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32725 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32732 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32736 \begin_layout Standard
32737 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
32738 and then use the menu
32740 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32746 \begin_inset space ~
32751 or the toolbar button
32754 arg "nomencl-insert"
32759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32770 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
32773 \begin_layout Standard
32774 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
32775 The first is the term or
32779 that you wish to define.
32784 of the term or symbol.
32787 \begin_layout Standard
32788 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32796 To use \SpecialChar TeX
32797 code for nomenclature entries the option
32801 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
32809 \begin_layout Subsection
32810 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
32811 \begin_inset Index idx
32814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32815 Nomenclature ! Layout
32823 \begin_layout Standard
32824 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
32828 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
32831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32835 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32843 \begin_inset Newline newline
32851 \begin_inset Newline newline
32857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32864 character starts/ends the formula.
32865 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32866 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
32868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32878 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
32888 \begin_layout Standard
32889 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32890 syntax is given in section
32891 \begin_inset space ~
32895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32897 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32904 \begin_layout Standard
32908 \begin_inset space ~
32913 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
32915 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
32916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32920 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32927 in this document is:
32928 \begin_inset Newline newline
32933 dummy entry for the character
32938 \begin_inset Newline newline
32950 \begin_inset space ~
32960 font use the command
32989 \begin_layout Standard
32990 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
32991 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32995 \begin_inset space \space{}
32999 \begin_inset Newline newline
33015 \begin_inset Newline newline
33018 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
33019 This command will make the font of all symbols
33026 \begin_inset space ~
33034 \begin_layout Standard
33035 If the characters |
33036 \begin_inset space \space{}
33040 \begin_inset space \space{}
33044 \begin_inset space \space{}
33048 \begin_inset space \space{}
33052 \begin_inset space \space{}
33055 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
33056 code they need to be escaped
33057 by adding a quote character in front of them.
33058 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33059 LatexCommand nomenclature
33060 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
33061 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
33069 \begin_layout Subsection
33070 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
33071 \begin_inset Index idx
33074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33075 Nomenclature ! Sort order
33083 \begin_layout Standard
33084 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33085 -code of the symbol
33087 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
33089 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
33092 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33093 LatexCommand nomenclature
33095 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
33103 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33107 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33108 LatexCommand nomenclature
33111 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
33117 They will be sorted by
33118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33144 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33147 will be sorted before the
33151 since the character
33152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33159 is considered in sorting.
33162 \begin_layout Standard
33163 To control the sort order, you can edit the
33166 \begin_inset space ~
33171 field of the nomenclature dialog.
33172 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
33174 For the example given, you can insert
33178 in this field for the
33179 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33186 will be located before
33187 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33193 \begin_layout Standard
33194 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
33199 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33209 \begin_layout Subsection
33210 Nomenclature Options
33211 \begin_inset Index idx
33214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33215 Nomenclature ! Options
33221 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33223 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
33230 \begin_layout Standard
33235 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
33236 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
33239 \begin_layout Description
33240 refeq Appends the phrase
33241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33256 to every nomenclature entry, where
33262 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
33265 \begin_layout Description
33266 refpage Appends the phrase
33267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33282 to every nomenclature entry, where
33288 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
33291 \begin_layout Description
33292 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
33295 \begin_layout Standard
33296 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
33297 class options list in the
33299 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33303 In this document the options
33310 \begin_layout Standard
33311 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33317 \begin_layout Standard
33318 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
33319 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
33324 field in the nomenclature dialog:
33327 \begin_layout Description
33337 \begin_layout Description
33340 nomrefpage Like the
33347 \begin_layout Description
33350 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
33359 \begin_layout Description
33363 \begin_inset space ~
33369 \begin_inset space ~
33374 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
33377 \begin_layout Standard
33379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33386 are automatically translated for most document languages.
33387 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
33391 \begin_layout Standard
33400 \begin_inset Newline newline
33406 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33410 \begin_inset space ~
33422 unskip, see equation
33425 \begin_inset Newline newline
33432 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33433 \begin_inset Newline newline
33439 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33443 \begin_inset space ~
33460 \begin_layout Standard
33461 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
33464 \begin_inset space ~
33469 in the document settings under
33472 \begin_inset space ~
33480 \begin_layout Standard
33488 \begin_inset Newline newline
33492 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33496 \begin_inset space ~
33508 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
33510 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
33511 \begin_inset Newline newline
33518 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33519 \begin_inset Newline newline
33523 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33527 \begin_inset space ~
33539 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
33544 \begin_layout Subsection
33545 Printing the Nomenclature
33546 \begin_inset Index idx
33549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33550 Nomenclature ! Printing
33558 \begin_layout Standard
33559 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
33561 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33562 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33578 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
33579 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
33580 You can choose between these settings:
33583 \begin_layout Description
33584 Default a space of 1
33585 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33591 \begin_layout Description
33593 \begin_inset space ~
33597 \begin_inset space ~
33600 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
33603 \begin_layout Description
33604 Custom custom space
33607 \begin_layout Standard
33608 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
33609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33617 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
33625 For example, in order to change the name to
33629 , add the following line to the preamble:
33632 \begin_layout Standard
33645 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
33648 \begin_layout Standard
33649 When you are using another document language than English, replace
33650 \begin_inset Newline newline
33665 , where *** is the name of the language used.
33668 \begin_layout Subsection
33669 Nomenclature Program
33670 \begin_inset Index idx
33673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33674 Nomenclature ! Program
33680 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33682 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
33689 \begin_layout Standard
33695 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33696 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
33698 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
33703 by adding options, see section
33704 \begin_inset space ~
33708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33710 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33715 The available options are listed and explained in
33716 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33718 key "nomencl,makeindex"
33726 \begin_layout Section
33728 \begin_inset Index idx
33731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33738 \begin_inset Index idx
33741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33742 Document ! Branches
33748 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33750 name "sec:Branches"
33757 \begin_layout Standard
33758 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
33759 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
33760 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
33761 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
33764 \begin_layout Standard
33765 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
33766 allows you to put text into branches.
33767 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
33768 To create a branch, either select the menu
33770 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33771 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
33774 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
33776 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33783 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
33784 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
33785 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
33786 and whether the name of the branch should
33787 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
33788 (see below for an example).
33789 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
33790 to the name of the other) and to add
33791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33799 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33803 \begin_inset space ~
33806 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
33807 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
33810 \begin_layout Standard
33811 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
33812 These boxes are inserted via the menu
33814 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33817 where you can choose a branch.
33818 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
33822 \begin_layout Standard
33823 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
33824 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
33827 \begin_layout Standard
33828 \begin_inset Branch Question
33832 \begin_layout Standard
33837 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
33845 \begin_layout Standard
33846 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33850 \begin_layout Standard
33855 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
33863 \begin_layout Standard
33870 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33871 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33874 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
33875 Consider for example a file
33876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33883 which has the above branches.
33885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33892 is active, the PDF export file would be called
33893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33916 branch were inactive,
33917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33932 branch was active, likewise
33933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33948 branch was active, and
33949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33952 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
33953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33956 if both branches were active.
33957 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
33958 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33964 \begin_layout Standard
33965 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
33971 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
33972 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
33976 \begin_inset space ~
33984 \begin_layout Standard
33985 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33989 \begin_layout Standard
33995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34002 branch is deactivated.
34008 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34014 \begin_layout Standard
34015 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
34016 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
34017 definitions for each branch.
34018 For example you can define for the question branch
34022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34023 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34024 -syntax, see section
34025 \begin_inset space ~
34029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34031 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34043 \begin_layout Standard
34053 \begin_layout Standard
34063 \begin_layout Standard
34064 and for the answer branch
34067 \begin_layout Standard
34077 \begin_layout Standard
34087 \begin_layout Standard
34088 \begin_inset Branch Question
34092 \begin_layout Standard
34096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34124 \begin_layout Standard
34125 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34129 \begin_layout Standard
34133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34161 \begin_layout Standard
34162 Now it is possible to use the
34166 question{\SpecialChar ldots
34173 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
34176 commands to obtain conditional output.
34177 Here is an example formula where only the
34184 \begin_inset Formula
34186 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
34194 \begin_layout Standard
34195 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
34203 \begin_layout Standard
34204 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
34206 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34210 \begin_inset space \space{}
34213 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
34215 For this advanced usage, see the
34221 Flex insets and InsetLayout
34226 \begin_layout Section
34228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34230 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
34235 \begin_inset Index idx
34238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34247 \begin_layout Standard
34250 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34251 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34254 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
34256 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34262 \begin_inset Index idx
34265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34267 packages ! hyperref
34272 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
34273 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
34274 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
34275 part of the document.
34279 \begin_layout Standard
34280 The header information in the dialog tab
34284 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
34285 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
34286 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
34287 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
34291 \begin_inset space ~
34295 \begin_inset space ~
34300 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
34301 tries to extract the header information from your document title
34302 and author entries.
34306 \begin_inset space ~
34310 \begin_inset space ~
34314 \begin_inset space ~
34319 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
34322 \begin_layout Standard
34323 You can specify in the dialog tab
34327 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
34332 \begin_inset space ~
34336 \begin_inset space ~
34340 \begin_inset space ~
34345 option allows long links to be split;
34348 \begin_inset space ~
34352 \begin_inset space ~
34356 \begin_inset space ~
34364 \begin_inset space ~
34369 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
34372 \begin_inset space ~
34377 colors the different links.
34378 The default colors are:
34381 \begin_layout Labeling
34382 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34387 for hyperlinks and URLs
34390 \begin_layout Labeling
34391 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34399 \begin_layout Labeling
34400 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34408 \begin_layout Standard
34409 but you can change these in the field
34414 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
34417 \begin_layout Standard
34420 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
34423 \begin_layout Standard
34428 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
34429 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
34430 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
34433 \begin_layout Standard
34438 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
34439 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
34440 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
34450 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
34451 when opening the PDF.
34453 \begin_inset space ~
34456 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
34457 \begin_inset space ~
34460 1 will only display the sections.
34463 \begin_layout Standard
34464 PDF properties are also used in this document.
34465 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
34471 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
34472 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34482 \begin_layout Section
34484 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34486 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34488 name "sec:TeX-Code"
34495 \begin_layout Subsection
34498 \begin_inset Index idx
34501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34509 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34511 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
34518 \begin_layout Standard
34519 As \SpecialChar LyX
34520 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
34521 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
34522 commands and constructs,
34525 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
34526 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
34527 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
34528 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34529 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
34530 cannot support all packages and
34534 \begin_layout Standard
34535 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
34536 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
34537 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
34541 Code box is created by the menu
34543 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34545 \begin_inset space ~
34550 or by the toolbar button
34563 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
34571 \begin_layout Standard
34572 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
34574 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
34576 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
34580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34581 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
34586 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34593 , you can write the command part
34599 in a \SpecialChar TeX
34600 Code box before the word and the closing brace
34604 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
34605 Code box behind the word.
34606 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
34607 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
34611 \begin_layout Standard
34612 \begin_inset Graphics
34613 filename clipart/ERT.png
34621 \begin_layout Standard
34625 \begin_layout Standard
34626 This is a line with a
34630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34653 \begin_layout Standard
34654 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34662 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34663 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
34664 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
34665 know that the command is finished.
34673 \begin_layout Subsection
34674 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34676 \begin_inset Argument 1
34679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34680 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34687 \begin_inset Index idx
34690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34698 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34700 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34707 \begin_layout Standard
34708 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
34709 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34710 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
34711 uses in the background.
34712 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
34713 is based on commands, you can
34714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34722 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
34723 any time if you know the right commands.
34724 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
34725 is the end of the day.
34726 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
34727 all caption labels bold.
34728 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
34730 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
34734 \begin_layout Standard
34735 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
34737 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34739 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34742 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34752 \begin_layout Standard
34753 As result you find that the package
34758 \begin_inset Index idx
34761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34769 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
34771 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34774 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34778 \begin_inset space ~
34786 \begin_layout Standard
34791 usepackage[options]{package name}
34794 \begin_layout Standard
34795 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
34796 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
34797 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
34798 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
34801 \begin_layout Standard
34802 In your case the package name is
34807 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
34812 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
34813 So you add the command
34816 \begin_layout Standard
34821 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
34824 \begin_layout Standard
34825 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
34829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34830 For more commands provided by the
34834 package, have a look at its documentation,
34835 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34850 \begin_layout Standard
34851 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
34853 For example if you use a
34857 class, you don't need the package
34861 , you can instead write
34864 \begin_layout Standard
34869 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
34874 \begin_layout Standard
34875 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
34876 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
34877 documentation of the document class you want to use.
34884 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
34887 \begin_layout Standard
34888 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
34889 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
34891 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34892 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
34893 Code box as described in the previous
34897 \begin_layout Standard
34898 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
34899 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34902 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34904 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
34912 \begin_layout Standard
34913 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34919 \begin_layout Standard
34923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34933 \begin_inset Note Note
34936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34937 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
34945 \begin_layout Left Header
34946 \begin_inset Argument 1
34949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34969 \begin_inset Note Note
34972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34973 defines the header line as described below
34981 \begin_layout Center Header
34982 \begin_inset Argument 1
34985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34994 \begin_layout Right Header
34995 \begin_inset Argument 1
34998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35019 \begin_layout Left Footer
35020 \begin_inset Argument 1
35023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35044 \begin_layout Center Footer
35045 \begin_inset Argument 1
35048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35060 \begin_inset Newline newline
35064 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35070 \begin_layout Right Footer
35071 \begin_inset Argument 1
35074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35096 \begin_layout Section
35097 Customized Page Headers and Footers
35098 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35100 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
35105 \begin_inset Index idx
35108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35109 Document ! Header/Footer line
35115 \begin_inset Index idx
35118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35127 \begin_layout Standard
35128 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
35132 \begin_inset space ~
35143 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35149 \begin_inset space ~
35155 As a second step add in the menu
35157 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35158 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35167 Custom Header/Footerlines
35170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35174 This module offers the following 6
35175 \begin_inset space ~
35181 \begin_layout Description
35183 \begin_inset space ~
35187 \begin_inset space ~
35191 \begin_inset space ~
35195 \begin_inset space ~
35199 \begin_inset space ~
35205 \begin_layout Description
35207 \begin_inset space ~
35211 \begin_inset space ~
35215 \begin_inset space ~
35219 \begin_inset space ~
35223 \begin_inset space ~
35229 \begin_layout Standard
35230 for the different positions in the header/footer.
35231 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
35234 \begin_layout Standard
35235 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
35236 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
35238 \begin_inset space ~
35242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35244 reference "fig:Page-layout"
35248 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
35251 \begin_layout Standard
35252 \begin_inset Float figure
35259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35262 \begin_inset Tabular
35263 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
35264 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
35265 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35266 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35267 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35269 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
35281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35287 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35298 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35316 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35327 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
35330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35331 The normal text on the page goes here.
35332 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
35334 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
35335 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
35340 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35349 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35360 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35378 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35389 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
35401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35407 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35425 \begin_inset Caption Standard
35427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35430 name "fig:Page-layout"
35434 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
35447 \begin_layout Standard
35448 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35456 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
35460 \begin_inset space ~
35465 is set to “Default”.
35466 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
35475 \begin_layout Subsection
35479 \begin_layout Standard
35480 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
35481 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
35482 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
35483 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
35485 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
35487 Defining the footer line works similarly.
35490 \begin_layout Standard
35491 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
35492 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
35496 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35498 \begin_inset space ~
35506 \begin_layout Description
35509 thepage prints the current page number
35512 \begin_layout Description
35515 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
35518 \begin_layout Description
35521 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
35524 \begin_layout Description
35527 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
35528 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
35531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35535 \begin_inset Quotes prd
35538 because it usually goes in a left header.
35541 \begin_layout Description
35544 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
35545 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
35547 It is normally used in the right header.
35550 \begin_layout Subsection
35551 Default header/footer
35554 \begin_layout Standard
35555 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
35556 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
35557 footer has the page number.
35558 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
35559 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
35560 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
35563 \begin_inset space ~
35571 \begin_layout Subsection
35575 \begin_layout Standard
35576 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
35577 Some pages are different.
35578 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
35579 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
35580 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
35581 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
35582 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
35585 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35586 Header and footer decoration line
35589 \begin_layout Standard
35590 By default, you get a 0.4
35591 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35594 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
35595 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
35607 in the following way:
35610 \begin_layout Standard
35617 headrulewidth}{thickness}
35620 \begin_layout Standard
35621 where thickness is a size in standard units like
35634 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
35635 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35641 \begin_layout Standard
35642 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35644 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
35645 \begin_inset space ~
35649 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35659 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35660 Several header/footer lines
35663 \begin_layout Standard
35664 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
35665 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
35666 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
35668 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35683 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35684 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35686 \begin_inset space ~
35694 \begin_layout Standard
35701 headheight}{height}
35704 \begin_layout Standard
35709 is a size in standard units (e.
35710 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35714 \begin_inset space \space{}
35722 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
35723 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
35724 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35725 logfile with the menu
35727 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35729 \begin_inset space ~
35737 \begin_inset space ~
35742 to see if you can find a warning about the package
35747 \begin_inset Index idx
35750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35752 packages ! fancyhdr
35758 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
35759 for your header/footer.
35762 \begin_layout Subsection
35766 \begin_layout Standard
35767 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
35768 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
35769 This example consists of the following definition:
35772 \begin_layout Description
35774 \begin_inset space ~
35783 , empty optional argument
35786 \begin_layout Description
35788 \begin_inset space ~
35791 Header empty, empty optional argument
35794 \begin_layout Description
35796 \begin_inset space ~
35805 in the optional argument
35808 \begin_layout Description
35810 \begin_inset space ~
35819 in the optional argument
35822 \begin_layout Description
35824 \begin_inset space ~
35837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35841 \begin_inset Newline newline
35845 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35852 in the optional argument
35855 \begin_layout Description
35857 \begin_inset space ~
35866 , empty optional argument
35869 \begin_layout Description
35872 headrulewidth set to 2
35873 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35879 \begin_layout Standard
35880 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
35881 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
35887 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35897 \begin_layout Standard
35898 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35904 \begin_layout Standard
35908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35912 pagestyle{headings}
35918 \begin_inset Note Note
35921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35922 switches back to page style with the default headings
35930 \begin_layout Section
35931 Previewing Snippets of your Document
35932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35934 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35939 \begin_inset Index idx
35942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35949 \begin_inset Index idx
35952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35961 \begin_layout Standard
35963 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
35964 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
35965 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
35968 \begin_layout Subsection
35972 \begin_layout Standard
35973 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35979 \begin_inset Index idx
35982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35984 packages ! preview-latex
35989 (on some systems named simply
35994 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
35996 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36003 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36005 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
36013 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
36014 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36015 -package are automatically
36016 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
36020 \begin_layout Subsection
36024 \begin_layout Standard
36025 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36026 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36028 activate the option
36031 \begin_inset space ~
36038 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36044 \begin_inset space ~
36048 \begin_inset space ~
36051 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
36058 \begin_inset space ~
36071 \begin_inset space ~
36076 is the multiplication factor for the size.
36079 \begin_layout Standard
36080 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36085 \begin_inset space ~
36093 \begin_inset space ~
36101 \begin_layout Standard
36102 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
36103 and when you finish
36107 \begin_layout Standard
36108 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36116 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
36117 generated by activating the option
36120 \begin_inset space ~
36126 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
36134 \begin_layout Subsection
36135 Selected document parts
36138 \begin_layout Standard
36139 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
36140 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
36141 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
36142 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36144 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
36146 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36150 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
36151 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
36152 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
36155 \begin_layout Standard
36156 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36163 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36175 is explained in section
36177 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
36182 \begin_inset space ~
36192 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
36193 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36194 the final rotated boxes,
36195 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
36196 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
36198 Here is the result:
36201 \begin_layout Standard
36202 \begin_inset Preview
36204 \begin_layout Standard
36209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36213 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
36219 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
36229 height_special "totalheight"
36234 backgroundcolor "none"
36237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36262 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
36268 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
36275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36290 \begin_layout Standard
36291 Previewing works also for colors.
36292 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36311 is explained in section
36318 \begin_inset space ~
36331 \begin_layout Standard
36332 \begin_inset Preview
36334 \begin_layout Standard
36338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36357 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
36362 This is text within a colored, framed box.
36366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36381 \begin_layout Standard
36382 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
36388 \begin_layout Standard
36389 If \SpecialChar LyX
36390 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
36391 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
36392 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
36393 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36394 packages in your document preamble that are required by
36395 the \SpecialChar TeX
36397 If \SpecialChar LyX
36398 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
36399 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
36401 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
36402 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
36403 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
36406 \begin_layout Subsection
36411 \begin_layout Standard
36412 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36413 source of the whole document or parts of it.
36416 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
36418 \begin_inset space ~
36423 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36425 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
36427 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
36428 's main window, then only this selection
36429 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
36430 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
36431 the source view window.
36436 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
36437 ; but note that if you have
36438 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
36440 not just the one which is open at the time.
36443 \begin_layout Section
36444 Advanced Find and Replace
36445 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36447 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
36452 \begin_inset Index idx
36455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36462 \begin_inset Index idx
36465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36474 \begin_layout Subsection
36478 \begin_layout Standard
36479 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
36480 allows for searching of complex,
36481 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
36483 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
36484 The key-features are:
36487 \begin_layout Itemize
36488 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
36489 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
36490 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
36494 \begin_layout Itemize
36495 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
36496 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
36497 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
36498 a section heading will only be found within section headings
36501 \begin_layout Itemize
36502 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
36503 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
36504 outside of mathematics environments
36507 \begin_layout Itemize
36508 Search may be widened to a specific
36513 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36517 \begin_inset space ~
36520 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
36521 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
36528 \begin_layout Itemize
36529 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
36530 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
36531 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36535 \begin_inset space ~
36538 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
36541 \begin_layout Subsection
36545 \begin_layout Standard
36546 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
36548 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
36561 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
36564 ) or the toolbar button
36567 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
36573 Advanced Find and Replace
36578 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36582 \begin_layout Standard
36588 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
36592 \begin_inset space ~
36597 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
36600 arg "paragraph-break"
36604 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
36605 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
36609 arg "paragraph-break"
36612 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
36616 searches backwards.
36619 \begin_layout Standard
36623 \begin_inset space ~
36628 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
36637 \begin_inset space ~
36642 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
36645 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36646 Searching for mathematics
36649 \begin_layout Standard
36650 Mathematical formulas, such as
36651 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
36654 or something more complex like
36655 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
36658 , may be searched for by typing them in the
36663 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
36664 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
36665 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
36666 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
36672 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36676 \begin_layout Standard
36677 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
36678 This is done by switching to the
36682 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
36687 This way, entering in the
36694 \begin_layout Itemize
36695 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
36696 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
36699 \begin_layout Itemize
36700 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
36701 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
36704 \begin_layout Itemize
36705 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
36706 of it only within section headings.
36707 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
36708 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
36712 \begin_layout Itemize
36713 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
36714 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
36717 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36721 \begin_layout Standard
36722 The entries made in the
36726 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
36729 \begin_inset space ~
36735 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
36739 button or alternatively press
36742 arg "paragraph-break"
36749 while the cursor is in the
36752 \begin_inset space ~
36760 \begin_layout Standard
36761 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
36763 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
36767 \begin_layout Itemize
36768 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
36769 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
36770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36777 with its typewriter version
36778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36792 \begin_layout Itemize
36793 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
36795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36799 \begin_inset Formula $R$
36803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36811 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
36815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36818 (you may want to enable the
36821 \begin_inset space ~
36829 \begin_inset space ~
36834 options and disable the
36842 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
36843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36850 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
36851 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
36855 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
36858 , or occurrences of
36859 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
36863 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
36869 \begin_layout Subsection
36873 \begin_layout Standard
36874 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
36878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36879 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
36881 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36883 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
36893 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
36899 This is done with the context menu
36901 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36902 Insert Regular Expression
36904 while the cursor is in the
36909 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
36910 expression matching rules
36914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36915 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
36918 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36922 \begin_inset space ~
36925 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
36926 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
36932 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
36933 same text in the document.
36934 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
36935 Examples of using such a feature may be:
36938 \begin_layout Enumerate
36939 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
36944 editor the fraction
36945 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
36949 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36952 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
36953 fractions with the given denominator.
36956 \begin_layout Enumerate
36957 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
36969 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36974 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
36975 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
36976 Also, by inserting a
36977 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36980 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
36981 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
36984 \begin_layout Standard
36985 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
36986 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
36987 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36990 , and referring back to them through
36991 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36995 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
36999 For example, try searching with the regexp
37000 \begin_inset Newline newline
37003 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
37006 \begin_inset Newline newline
37009 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
37012 \begin_layout Standard
37013 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
37016 \begin_layout Standard
37017 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37025 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
37026 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
37027 sub-expressions is absolute.
37029 \begin_inset space ~
37033 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37036 always refers to the first occurrence of
37037 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37040 in all entered regexps.
37048 \begin_layout Section
37050 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37052 name "sec:Spellchecking"
37057 \begin_inset Index idx
37060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37069 \begin_layout Standard
37071 has a built-in spell checker.
37074 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37081 key or the toolbar button
37084 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
37087 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
37088 beginning of the currently selected text.
37089 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
37090 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
37091 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
37092 scrolled so that it is visible.
37093 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
37094 n, if any could be found.
37095 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
37099 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
37100 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
37103 \begin_layout Standard
37104 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
37107 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37111 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
37112 a different one at the top of the dialog.
37114 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
37115 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
37118 \begin_inset space ~
37126 arg "dialog-show character"
37129 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
37131 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
37134 \begin_layout Standard
37135 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37136 can be downloaded from here:
37137 \begin_inset Newline newline
37141 \begin_inset Flex URL
37144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37146 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
37152 \begin_inset Newline newline
37156 \begin_inset space ~
37159 files for each language.
37160 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
37161 \begin_inset space ~
37164 files into \SpecialChar LyX
37165 's installation subfolder
37173 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37175 \begin_inset Newline newline
37178 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
37179 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
37180 but in most cases these are
37196 is the language code.
37199 \begin_layout Subsection
37203 \begin_layout Standard
37206 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37207 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37209 \begin_inset space ~
37212 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37215 you can set the following things:
37218 \begin_layout Description
37220 \begin_inset space ~
37223 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
37224 should use for spell checking.
37225 Depending on your platform,
37235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37236 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
37237 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
37252 \begin_inset space ~
37255 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
37258 \begin_layout Description
37260 \begin_inset space ~
37263 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
37264 will always use the given language
37265 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
37268 \begin_layout Description
37270 \begin_inset space ~
37273 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
37275 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37279 \begin_inset space \space{}
37283 This should normally not be needed.
37286 \begin_layout Description
37288 \begin_inset space ~
37292 \begin_inset space ~
37295 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
37297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37307 \begin_layout Description
37309 \begin_inset space ~
37312 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
37313 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
37314 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
37315 appear in a context menu.
37316 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
37320 \begin_layout Description
37322 \begin_inset space ~
37326 \begin_inset space ~
37330 \begin_inset space ~
37333 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
37337 \begin_layout Section
37339 \begin_inset Index idx
37342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37349 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37351 name "sec:Thesaurus"
37358 \begin_layout Standard
37360 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
37361 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
37370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37371 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37373 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
37383 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
37385 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
37386 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
37387 which are available for many languages.
37390 \begin_layout Standard
37391 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
37392 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
37396 \begin_layout Subsection
37397 Setting up the thesaurus
37400 \begin_layout Standard
37409 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
37413 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
37418 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
37420 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37424 \begin_inset space ~
37432 For instance, the US English files are named:
37435 \begin_layout Itemize
37439 \begin_layout Itemize
37443 \begin_layout Standard
37452 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
37453 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
37456 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37457 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37458 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37460 \begin_inset space ~
37465 ) to the path where they are installed.
37469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37470 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
37471 ies, typical locations are
37477 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
37481 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
37485 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
37488 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
37494 LibreOffice-<Version>
37501 On the Mac, the default location is
37503 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
37504 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37505 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
37506 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
37507 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37508 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37516 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
37517 during the \SpecialChar LyX
37518 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
37522 \begin_layout Standard
37523 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
37524 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
37526 \begin_inset Newline newline
37530 \begin_inset Flex URL
37533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37535 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
37543 \begin_layout Standard
37544 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
37545 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
37547 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37548 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37549 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37551 \begin_inset space ~
37556 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37558 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
37559 and point \SpecialChar LyX
37563 \begin_layout Standard
37564 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
37566 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37569 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
37575 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
37578 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
37579 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
37581 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37587 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37588 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37589 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37591 \begin_inset space ~
37596 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
37599 \begin_layout Subsection
37600 Using the thesaurus
37603 \begin_layout Standard
37604 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
37606 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37609 or the toolbar button
37612 arg "thesaurus-entry"
37615 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
37617 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
37619 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
37620 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
37621 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
37630 ), related terms (such as
37633 \begin_inset space ~
37642 ), compounds (such as
37645 \begin_inset space ~
37654 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
37663 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
37666 \begin_layout Standard
37667 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
37668 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
37672 \begin_layout Standard
37673 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
37674 the dictionary, such as the above
37678 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
37679 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37683 \begin_inset space \space{}
37686 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
37687 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
37688 For example, looking up the word form
37692 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
37697 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
37698 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37702 \begin_inset space \space{}
37713 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
37714 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
37715 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
37718 \begin_layout Section
37720 \begin_inset Index idx
37723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37730 \begin_inset Index idx
37733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37734 Document ! Change Tracking
37740 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37742 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
37749 \begin_layout Standard
37750 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
37751 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
37752 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
37753 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
37755 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37757 \begin_inset space ~
37760 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37762 \begin_inset space ~
37770 \begin_layout Standard
37771 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
37785 The color depends on the author that made the change.
37786 You can change the color in
37788 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37789 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37791 \begin_inset space ~
37795 \begin_inset space ~
37800 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37806 \begin_inset Index idx
37809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37810 Color ! Change tracking
37815 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
37816 's status bar when the
37817 cursor is in changed text.
37818 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
37821 arg "changes-merge"
37827 \begin_layout Standard
37828 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
37830 \begin_inset Index idx
37833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37842 \begin_layout Standard
37843 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37849 \begin_layout Standard
37850 \begin_inset Graphics
37851 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
37859 \begin_layout Standard
37860 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37866 \begin_layout Standard
37867 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
37870 \begin_layout Standard
37871 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37877 \begin_layout Standard
37878 \begin_inset Tabular
37879 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
37880 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37881 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37882 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37883 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37892 arg "changes-track"
37900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37906 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37908 \begin_inset space ~
37911 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37913 \begin_inset space ~
37922 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37931 arg "changes-output"
37939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37945 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37947 \begin_inset space ~
37950 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37952 \begin_inset space ~
37956 \begin_inset space ~
37960 \begin_inset space ~
37969 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37990 Jumps to the next change
37996 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38005 arg "change-accept"
38013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38019 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38021 \begin_inset space ~
38024 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38026 \begin_inset space ~
38035 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38044 arg "change-reject"
38052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38058 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38060 \begin_inset space ~
38063 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38065 \begin_inset space ~
38074 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38083 arg "changes-merge"
38091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38097 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38099 \begin_inset space ~
38102 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38104 \begin_inset space ~
38113 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38122 arg "all-changes-accept"
38130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38136 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38138 \begin_inset space ~
38141 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38143 \begin_inset space ~
38147 \begin_inset space ~
38156 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38165 arg "all-changes-reject"
38173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38179 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38181 \begin_inset space ~
38184 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38186 \begin_inset space ~
38190 \begin_inset space ~
38199 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38222 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38223 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
38225 \begin_inset space ~
38234 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38257 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38259 \begin_inset space ~
38275 \begin_layout Standard
38276 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38282 \begin_layout Standard
38283 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
38303 \begin_layout Standard
38304 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
38305 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
38306 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
38307 the next change after the current cursor position.
38308 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
38309 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
38310 step to the next change.
38311 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
38314 \begin_layout Standard
38315 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
38316 to describe a change.
38319 \begin_layout Standard
38321 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
38322 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38328 \begin_inset Index idx
38331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38339 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
38341 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38348 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38354 \begin_layout Section
38355 Comparison of Documents
38356 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38358 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38363 \begin_inset Index idx
38366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38367 Comparison of documents
38375 \begin_layout Standard
38376 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
38379 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38383 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
38384 file with change tracking enabled showing the
38386 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
38388 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
38392 \begin_inset space ~
38396 \begin_inset space ~
38400 \begin_inset space ~
38409 \begin_inset space ~
38413 \begin_inset space ~
38417 \begin_inset space ~
38421 \begin_inset space ~
38425 \begin_inset space ~
38429 \begin_inset space ~
38434 enables the change tracking option
38437 \begin_inset space ~
38441 \begin_inset space ~
38445 \begin_inset space ~
38450 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
38453 \begin_layout Section
38454 International Support
38455 \begin_inset Index idx
38458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38459 International support
38467 \begin_layout Standard
38468 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
38469 with any language you want.
38470 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
38471 up \SpecialChar LyX
38473 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38475 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
38483 \begin_layout Standard
38484 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
38485 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
38486 \begin_inset space ~
38490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38492 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
38499 \begin_layout Subsection
38501 \begin_inset Index idx
38504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38511 \begin_inset Index idx
38514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38515 Document ! Settings
38521 \begin_inset Index idx
38524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38525 Document ! Language
38533 \begin_layout Standard
38536 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38537 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38540 dialog lets you set
38542 the language, the quote style and character encoding
38547 \begin_layout Standard
38552 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38557 \begin_inset space ~
38562 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
38563 For details about the different encoding options see section
38564 \begin_inset space ~
38568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38570 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
38577 \begin_layout Subsection
38578 Keyboard mapping configuration
38579 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38581 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
38588 \begin_layout Standard
38589 If you have for example a U.
38590 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38593 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
38594 can use an alternate keymap.
38595 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
38600 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38601 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38602 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
38605 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
38606 \begin_inset space ~
38610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38612 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
38617 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
38618 which one you want to use.
38621 \begin_layout Standard
38622 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
38623 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
38624 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
38625 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38628 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
38629 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
38630 one to support the characters you want.
38631 This and many other customizations are explained in the
38638 \begin_layout Chapter
38641 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38643 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
38650 \begin_layout Standard
38651 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
38652 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
38653 topic inside the user's guide.
38656 \begin_layout Section
38658 \begin_inset Index idx
38661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38670 \begin_layout Standard
38675 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
38678 \begin_layout Subsection
38682 \begin_layout Standard
38683 Creates a new document.
38686 \begin_layout Subsection
38690 \begin_layout Standard
38691 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
38692 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
38693 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
38695 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
38696 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
38702 \begin_layout Subsection
38706 \begin_layout Standard
38710 \begin_layout Subsection
38714 \begin_layout Standard
38715 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
38716 Click there on a file to open it.
38719 \begin_layout Subsection
38721 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
38725 \begin_layout Standard
38727 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
38728 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
38732 \begin_layout Subsection
38736 \begin_layout Standard
38737 Closes the current document.
38740 \begin_layout Subsection
38744 \begin_layout Standard
38745 Closes all opened documents.
38748 \begin_layout Subsection
38752 \begin_layout Standard
38753 Saves the actual document.
38756 \begin_layout Subsection
38760 \begin_layout Standard
38761 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
38762 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
38766 \begin_layout Subsection
38768 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
38772 \begin_layout Standard
38774 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
38775 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
38781 \begin_layout Subsection
38785 \begin_layout Standard
38786 Saves all opened documents.
38789 \begin_layout Subsection
38793 \begin_layout Standard
38794 Reloads the actual document from disk.
38797 \begin_layout Subsection
38801 \begin_layout Standard
38802 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
38803 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
38804 It is described in the section
38806 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
38811 Additional Features
38816 \begin_layout Subsection
38820 \begin_layout Standard
38821 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
38822 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
38824 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
38825 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
38829 \begin_layout Standard
38830 When using the menu entry
38833 \begin_inset space ~
38838 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
38842 \begin_inset space ~
38846 \begin_inset space ~
38850 \begin_inset space ~
38855 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
38856 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
38859 \begin_layout Subsection
38861 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38863 name "subsec:Export"
38870 \begin_layout Standard
38871 You can export your document to various file formats.
38872 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
38874 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
38875 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
38876 during its configuration.
38879 \begin_layout Standard
38880 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
38882 \begin_inset space ~
38886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38888 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
38895 \begin_layout Description
38901 \begin_inset space ~
38904 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
38906 \begin_inset space ~
38909 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
38910 \begin_inset Newline newline
38913 Since \SpecialChar LyX
38914 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
38918 \begin_layout Description
38919 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
38925 \begin_layout Description
38927 \begin_inset space ~
38930 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
38936 \begin_layout Description
38937 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
38938 's native DVI-format.
38939 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
38940 files paths or file names in your document.
38942 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
38949 \begin_layout Description
38950 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
38951 in files paths or file names
38954 \begin_layout Description
38956 \begin_inset space ~
38963 ) DVI-format using the program
38965 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38968 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
38972 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38980 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
38988 \begin_layout Description
38990 \begin_inset space ~
38993 (cropped) the same as
38997 but with cropped page margins.
39000 \begin_layout Description
39002 \begin_inset space ~
39005 Dot text file with code in the programming language
39009 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
39014 \begin_layout Description
39018 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39026 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
39034 \begin_layout Description
39036 \begin_inset space ~
39040 \begin_inset space ~
39043 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
39047 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
39055 \begin_layout Description
39059 \begin_inset space ~
39068 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39069 source that is compilable with the program
39071 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39075 \begin_layout Description
39079 \begin_inset space ~
39084 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39085 source, additionally all images used in the document
39086 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
39090 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
39093 \begin_layout Description
39097 \begin_inset space ~
39102 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39103 source code, additionally all images used in the document
39104 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
39112 \begin_layout Description
39116 \begin_inset space ~
39125 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39126 source that is compilable with the program
39132 \begin_layout Description
39134 \begin_inset space ~
39138 \begin_inset space ~
39145 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39146 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
39152 \begin_layout Description
39154 \begin_inset space ~
39157 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
39158 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
39160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39164 \begin_inset space \space{}
39169 \begin_inset space ~
39173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39188 represent the version number)
39191 \begin_layout Description
39193 \begin_inset space ~
39197 \begin_inset space ~
39200 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
39201 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
39202 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39206 \begin_layout Description
39207 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
39208 's internal XHTML engine
39211 \begin_layout Description
39213 \begin_inset space ~
39217 \begin_inset space ~
39221 \begin_inset space ~
39225 \begin_inset space ~
39228 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
39233 For the conversion the program
39242 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39245 \begin_layout Description
39246 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
39251 \begin_layout Description
39253 \begin_inset space ~
39256 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
39258 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
39261 For the conversion the program
39270 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39273 \begin_layout Description
39275 \begin_inset space ~
39278 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
39279 For the conversion the program
39288 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39291 \begin_layout Description
39293 \begin_inset space ~
39296 (cropped) the same as
39299 \begin_inset space ~
39304 but with cropped page margins
39307 \begin_layout Description
39311 \begin_inset space ~
39316 PDF-format using the program
39320 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39323 \begin_layout Description
39327 \begin_inset space ~
39331 \begin_inset space ~
39339 \begin_inset space ~
39344 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
39345 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39349 \begin_inset space \space{}
39352 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
39356 \begin_layout Description
39360 \begin_inset space ~
39365 PDF-format using the program
39367 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39370 , produces PDF-files directly
39373 \begin_layout Description
39377 \begin_inset space ~
39382 PDF-format using the program
39386 , produces PDF-files directly
39389 \begin_layout Description
39393 \begin_inset space ~
39398 PDF-format using the program
39402 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39405 \begin_layout Description
39409 \begin_inset space ~
39414 PDF-format using the program
39419 , produces PDF-files directly
39422 \begin_layout Description
39426 \begin_inset space ~
39434 \begin_layout Description
39438 \begin_inset space ~
39442 \begin_inset space ~
39447 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
39448 and then exported as text using the program
39453 \begin_layout Description
39458 PostScript format using the program
39466 options see section
39467 \begin_inset space ~
39471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39473 reference "subsec:General-output"
39480 \begin_layout Description
39481 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39482 source and also code in the statistical programming
39496 it is possible to use
39500 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
39504 \begin_layout Standard
39505 If one of the menu entries
39512 \begin_inset space ~
39521 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39523 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39525 \begin_inset space ~
39529 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39531 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39536 \begin_inset Index idx
39539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39540 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39549 \begin_layout Subsection
39553 \begin_layout Standard
39554 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
39555 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
39558 \begin_inset space ~
39562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39564 reference "sec:Paths"
39569 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
39578 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
39579 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
39580 's preferences as described in section
39581 \begin_inset space ~
39585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39587 reference "subsec:Converters"
39594 \begin_layout Subsection
39595 New and Close Window
39598 \begin_layout Standard
39599 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
39603 \begin_layout Subsection
39607 \begin_layout Standard
39608 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
39611 \begin_layout Section
39613 \begin_inset Index idx
39616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39625 \begin_layout Subsection
39629 \begin_layout Standard
39630 Described in section
39631 \begin_inset space ~
39635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39637 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
39644 \begin_layout Subsection
39645 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
39648 \begin_layout Standard
39649 Described in section
39650 \begin_inset space ~
39654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39656 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39663 \begin_layout Subsection
39667 \begin_layout Standard
39668 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
39669 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
39672 \begin_layout Subsection
39676 \begin_layout Standard
39677 Selects the whole document.
39680 \begin_layout Subsection
39681 Find & Replace (Quick)
39684 \begin_layout Standard
39685 Described in section
39686 \begin_inset space ~
39690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39692 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39699 \begin_layout Subsection
39700 Find & Replace (Advanced)
39703 \begin_layout Standard
39704 Described in section
39705 \begin_inset space ~
39709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39711 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
39718 \begin_layout Subsection
39719 Move Paragraph Up/Down
39722 \begin_layout Standard
39723 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
39727 \begin_layout Subsection
39729 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39733 \begin_layout Standard
39735 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39736 Described in section
39737 \begin_inset space ~
39741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39743 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39752 \begin_layout Subsection
39754 \begin_inset Index idx
39757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39758 Paragraph ! Settings
39766 \begin_layout Standard
39767 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
39768 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
39772 \begin_layout Standard
39773 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
39774 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
39780 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39781 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39783 \begin_inset space ~
39789 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
39793 \begin_layout Subsection
39795 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
39799 \begin_layout Standard
39801 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39802 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
39807 \begin_layout Enumerate
39809 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
39810 Customize text properties by means of the
39816 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
39819 ; this is described in section
39820 \begin_inset space ~
39824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39826 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39833 \begin_layout Enumerate
39835 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
39836 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
39838 Apply last settings
39841 \begin_layout Enumerate
39843 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39844 Change the casing of selected text (
39859 \begin_layout Subsection
39861 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
39865 \begin_layout Standard
39867 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
39868 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
39869 text styles (in the case of this document:
39891 \begin_inset space ~
39895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39897 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
39906 \begin_layout Subsection
39907 Table and Rows & Columns
39910 \begin_layout Standard
39911 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
39912 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
39913 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
39916 \begin_layout Subsection
39920 \begin_layout Standard
39921 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
39922 It will dissolve this inset.
39923 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
39927 \begin_layout Subsection
39931 \begin_layout Standard
39932 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
39933 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
39936 \begin_layout Subsection
39937 Increase/Decrease List Depth
39940 \begin_layout Standard
39941 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
39943 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
39944 \begin_inset space ~
39948 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39950 reference "sec:Nesting"
39955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39957 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
39964 \begin_layout Section
39966 \begin_inset Index idx
39969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39978 \begin_layout Standard
39979 At the bottom of the
39983 menu the opened documents are listed.
39986 \begin_layout Subsection
39987 Open/Close all Insets
39990 \begin_layout Standard
39991 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
39994 \begin_layout Subsection
39995 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
39998 \begin_layout Standard
39999 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
40002 \begin_layout Standard
40003 Math macros are described in the
40010 \begin_layout Subsection
40014 \begin_layout Standard
40015 Shows the outline window as described in sections
40016 \begin_inset space ~
40020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40022 reference "sec:Navigating"
40027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40029 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
40036 \begin_layout Subsection
40040 \begin_layout Standard
40041 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
40043 \begin_inset space ~
40047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40049 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
40056 \begin_layout Subsection
40060 \begin_layout Standard
40061 Opens a window showing console messages.
40062 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
40064 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40067 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
40068 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
40069 is processing the document.
40072 \begin_layout Subsection
40074 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40076 name "subsec:Toolbars"
40081 \begin_inset Index idx
40084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40093 \begin_layout Standard
40094 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
40096 All toolbars and the
40099 \begin_inset space ~
40104 can be turned on and off.
40109 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
40121 \begin_inset space ~
40133 \begin_inset space ~
40138 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
40142 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
40149 \begin_layout Standard
40154 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
40158 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
40159 or when a certain feature is enabled.
40160 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
40161 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
40162 is inside a formula or table respectively.
40165 \begin_layout Standard
40167 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
40168 \begin_inset space ~
40172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40174 reference "sec:Toolbars"
40181 \begin_layout Subsection
40185 \begin_layout Standard
40189 \begin_inset space ~
40193 \begin_inset space ~
40197 \begin_inset space ~
40201 \begin_inset space ~
40205 \begin_inset space ~
40209 \begin_inset space ~
40214 will split \SpecialChar LyX
40215 's main window vertically while
40218 \begin_inset space ~
40222 \begin_inset space ~
40226 \begin_inset space ~
40230 \begin_inset space ~
40234 \begin_inset space ~
40238 \begin_inset space ~
40243 will split it horizontally.
40244 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
40245 to view the same document, but at different positions.
40246 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
40247 three or more documents at the same time.
40248 To close a split view, use the menu
40251 \begin_inset space ~
40255 \begin_inset space ~
40263 \begin_layout Subsection
40267 \begin_layout Standard
40268 Closes a split view.
40271 \begin_layout Subsection
40275 \begin_layout Standard
40276 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
40277 so that you will see nothing but your text.
40278 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
40279 's main window fullscreen.
40280 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
40281 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
40284 \begin_layout Section
40286 \begin_inset Index idx
40289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40298 \begin_layout Subsection
40302 \begin_layout Standard
40303 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
40304 \begin_inset space ~
40308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40310 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
40321 \begin_layout Subsection
40323 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40325 name "subsec:Special-Character"
40332 \begin_layout Standard
40333 Here you can insert the following characters:
40336 \begin_layout Description
40341 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
40344 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
40345 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40346 -packages you have installed.
40347 You can get a complete display by checking
40350 \begin_inset space ~
40356 \begin_inset Newline newline
40360 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40368 Not all characters will be visible in the
40372 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
40373 dialog (see section
40374 \begin_inset space ~
40378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40380 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
40384 ) can display every character.
40392 \begin_layout Description
40393 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
40397 \begin_layout Description
40399 \begin_inset space ~
40403 \begin_inset space ~
40406 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
40407 \begin_inset space ~
40411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40413 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
40420 \begin_layout Description
40422 \begin_inset space ~
40425 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
40428 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40429 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40435 \begin_layout Description
40437 \begin_inset space ~
40440 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
40443 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40444 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40450 \begin_layout Description
40452 \begin_inset space ~
40455 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
40459 \begin_layout Description
40461 \begin_inset space ~
40464 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
40468 \begin_layout Description
40470 \begin_inset space ~
40474 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
40475 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing
40481 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40486 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
40488 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40492 \begin_inset space \space{}
40495 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
40496 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
40502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40505 To insert a fraction use the command
40510 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40514 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40523 The visible space is hereby the character before the
40530 \begin_layout Description
40532 \begin_inset space ~
40535 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
40539 \begin_layout Description
40541 \begin_inset space ~
40545 \begin_inset Index idx
40548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40555 \begin_inset Index idx
40558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40559 Language ! Phonetic symbols
40564 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
40565 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
40567 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40573 \begin_inset Index idx
40576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40584 \begin_inset Newline newline
40587 More information about this feature can be found in the
40593 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
40599 \begin_layout Description
40600 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
40602 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
40603 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
40607 \begin_layout Subsection
40611 \begin_layout Standard
40612 Opens a submenu with the following options:
40615 \begin_layout Description
40616 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
40617 \begin_inset script superscript
40619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40628 \begin_layout Description
40629 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
40630 \begin_inset script subscript
40632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40641 \begin_layout Description
40643 \begin_inset space ~
40646 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
40647 \begin_inset space ~
40651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40653 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
40660 \begin_layout Description
40662 \begin_inset space ~
40665 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
40666 \begin_inset space ~
40670 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40672 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
40679 \begin_layout Description
40681 \begin_inset space ~
40684 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
40685 \begin_inset space ~
40689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40691 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
40698 \begin_layout Description
40700 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
40702 \begin_inset space ~
40705 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
40707 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40711 \begin_inset space \space{}
40714 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
40715 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
40721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40724 To insert a fraction use the command
40729 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40733 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40742 The visible space is hereby the character before the
40751 \begin_layout Description
40753 \begin_inset space ~
40756 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
40757 \begin_inset space ~
40761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40763 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
40770 \begin_layout Description
40772 \begin_inset space ~
40775 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
40776 \begin_inset space ~
40780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40782 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
40789 \begin_layout Description
40791 \begin_inset space ~
40794 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
40795 \begin_inset space ~
40799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40801 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
40808 \begin_layout Description
40809 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
40810 \begin_inset space ~
40814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40816 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
40823 \begin_layout Description
40825 \begin_inset space ~
40828 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
40829 \begin_inset space ~
40833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40835 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
40842 \begin_layout Description
40844 \begin_inset space ~
40847 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
40848 \begin_inset space ~
40852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40854 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
40861 \begin_layout Description
40863 \begin_inset space ~
40867 \begin_inset space ~
40870 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
40873 \begin_inset space ~
40877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40879 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
40886 for a usage example.
40889 \begin_layout Description
40891 \begin_inset space ~
40895 \begin_inset space ~
40898 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
40899 \begin_inset space ~
40903 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40905 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40912 \begin_layout Description
40914 \begin_inset space ~
40917 Break Inserts a forced line break that
40918 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
40921 justifies the remaining text as described in section
40922 \begin_inset space ~
40926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40928 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40935 \begin_layout Description
40937 \begin_inset space ~
40940 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
40941 \begin_inset space ~
40945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40947 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40954 \begin_layout Description
40956 \begin_inset space ~
40959 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
40960 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
40962 \begin_inset space ~
40966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40968 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40975 \begin_layout Description
40977 \begin_inset space ~
40980 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
40981 \begin_inset space ~
40985 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40987 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40994 \begin_layout Description
40996 \begin_inset space ~
41000 \begin_inset space ~
41003 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
41004 \begin_inset space ~
41008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41010 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41017 \begin_layout Subsection
41019 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
41023 \begin_layout Standard
41025 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
41026 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
41027 The submenu allows you to insert
41030 \begin_layout Description
41032 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
41034 \begin_inset space ~
41037 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
41040 \begin_layout Description
41042 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
41044 \begin_inset space ~
41048 \begin_inset space ~
41051 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
41055 \begin_layout Description
41057 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
41059 \begin_inset space ~
41062 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
41065 \begin_layout Description
41067 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
41069 \begin_inset space ~
41072 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
41075 \begin_layout Description
41077 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
41079 \begin_inset space ~
41083 \begin_inset space ~
41086 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
41090 \begin_layout Description
41092 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
41094 \begin_inset space ~
41097 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
41100 \begin_layout Description
41102 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
41104 \begin_inset space ~
41108 \begin_inset space ~
41112 \begin_inset space ~
41115 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
41118 \begin_layout Description
41120 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
41122 \begin_inset space ~
41125 Name inserts the user name as specified in
41127 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41128 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41134 \begin_layout Description
41136 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
41138 \begin_inset space ~
41141 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
41143 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41144 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41150 \begin_layout Description
41152 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
41153 Other\SpecialChar ldots
41154 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
41155 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
41158 \begin_layout Subsection
41161 List/Contents/References
41164 \begin_layout Standard
41165 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
41169 \begin_inset space ~
41190 are described in section
41191 \begin_inset space ~
41195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41197 reference "sec:toc"
41206 is described in section
41207 \begin_inset space ~
41211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41213 reference "sec:Index"
41221 is described in section
41222 \begin_inset space ~
41226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41228 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41234 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41237 is described in section
41238 \begin_inset space ~
41242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41244 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
41251 \begin_layout Subsection
41255 \begin_layout Standard
41256 To insert floats, as described in section
41257 \begin_inset space ~
41261 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41263 reference "sec:Floats"
41267 and in detail the chapter
41274 \begin_inset space ~
41282 \begin_layout Subsection
41286 \begin_layout Standard
41287 To insert notes, described in section
41288 \begin_inset space ~
41292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41294 reference "sec:Notes"
41301 \begin_layout Subsection
41305 \begin_layout Standard
41306 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
41308 Branches are described in section
41309 \begin_inset space ~
41313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41315 reference "sec:Branches"
41322 \begin_layout Subsection
41326 \begin_layout Standard
41327 Inserts document class-specific insets.
41328 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
41330 An example is the document class
41331 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
41333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41341 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
41345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41350 with three custom insets.
41353 Flex insets and InsetLayout
41357 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
41363 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
41366 \begin_layout Subsection
41368 \begin_inset Index idx
41371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41380 \begin_layout Standard
41381 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
41383 For more information see chapter
41385 External Document Parts
41388 \begin_inset space ~
41394 \begin_layout Subsection
41396 \begin_inset Index idx
41399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41408 \begin_layout Standard
41409 Inserts a box in a certain style.
41410 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
41417 \begin_inset space ~
41425 \begin_layout Subsection
41429 \begin_layout Standard
41434 dialog as described in section
41435 \begin_inset space ~
41439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41441 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41448 \begin_layout Subsection
41452 \begin_layout Standard
41457 as described in section
41458 \begin_inset space ~
41462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41464 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41471 \begin_layout Subsection
41475 \begin_layout Standard
41480 as described in section
41481 \begin_inset space ~
41485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41487 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41494 \begin_layout Subsection
41496 \begin_inset Index idx
41499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41506 \begin_inset Index idx
41509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41510 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
41518 \begin_layout Standard
41519 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
41520 Floats are described in section
41521 \begin_inset space ~
41525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41527 reference "sec:Floats"
41531 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
41534 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
41542 \begin_inset space ~
41550 \begin_layout Subsection
41554 \begin_layout Standard
41555 Inserts an index entry as described in section
41556 \begin_inset space ~
41560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41562 reference "sec:Index"
41569 \begin_layout Subsection
41573 \begin_layout Standard
41574 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
41575 \begin_inset space ~
41579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41581 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41588 \begin_layout Subsection
41592 \begin_layout Standard
41593 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
41594 Tables are described in section
41595 \begin_inset space ~
41599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41601 reference "sec:Tables"
41605 and in detail in the chapter
41612 \begin_inset space ~
41620 \begin_layout Subsection
41624 \begin_layout Standard
41630 Graphics are described in section
41631 \begin_inset space ~
41635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41637 reference "sec:Graphics"
41644 \begin_layout Subsection
41648 \begin_layout Standard
41649 Inserts a URL as described in section
41650 \begin_inset space ~
41654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41656 reference "subsec:URLs"
41663 \begin_layout Subsection
41667 \begin_layout Standard
41668 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
41669 \begin_inset space ~
41673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41675 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
41682 \begin_layout Subsection
41686 \begin_layout Standard
41687 Inserts a footnote as described in section
41688 \begin_inset space ~
41692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41694 reference "sec:Footnotes"
41701 \begin_layout Subsection
41705 \begin_layout Standard
41706 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
41707 \begin_inset space ~
41711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41713 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
41720 \begin_layout Subsection
41723 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
41726 \begin_layout Standard
41727 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
41728 environments of the same type.
41730 \begin_inset space ~
41734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41736 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
41740 for an explanation.
41743 \begin_layout Subsection
41747 \begin_layout Standard
41748 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
41749 title or caption of a float.
41750 Inserts a short title as described in section
41751 \begin_inset space ~
41755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41757 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
41764 \begin_layout Subsection
41769 \begin_layout Standard
41770 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
41771 Code box as described in section
41772 \begin_inset space ~
41776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41778 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
41785 \begin_layout Subsection
41787 \begin_inset Index idx
41790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41799 \begin_layout Standard
41800 Inserts a program listings box.
41801 Program listings are explained in the chapter
41803 Program Code Listings
41808 \begin_inset space ~
41816 \begin_layout Subsection
41818 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41822 \begin_layout Standard
41824 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41825 Inserts the actual date.
41826 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
41833 \begin_layout Subsection
41837 \begin_layout Standard
41838 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
41839 \begin_inset space ~
41843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41845 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41852 \begin_layout Section
41854 \begin_inset Index idx
41857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41866 \begin_layout Standard
41867 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
41868 \begin_inset space ~
41871 of the current document.
41872 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
41875 \begin_layout Subsection
41879 \begin_layout Standard
41880 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
41881 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
41882 to jump, for example, between section
41883 \begin_inset space ~
41887 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
41888 \begin_inset space ~
41891 2.5 and use the submenu
41894 \begin_inset space ~
41898 \begin_inset space ~
41905 \begin_inset space ~
41911 \begin_inset space ~
41915 \begin_inset space ~
41921 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
41925 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
41931 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
41934 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
41937 \begin_layout Standard
41938 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
41942 \begin_inset space ~
41947 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
41950 \begin_inset space ~
41955 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
41958 \begin_layout Subsection
41959 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
41962 \begin_layout Standard
41963 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
41967 \begin_layout Subsection
41971 \begin_layout Standard
41972 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
41973 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
41974 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
41978 \begin_inset space ~
41982 \begin_inset space ~
41990 \begin_layout Subsection
41994 \begin_layout Standard
41995 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
41998 The \SpecialChar LyX
41999 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
42001 \begin_inset space ~
42009 \begin_inset space ~
42014 manual for a detailed description.
42017 \begin_layout Section
42019 \begin_inset Index idx
42022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42031 \begin_layout Subsection
42035 \begin_layout Standard
42036 Change Tracking is described in section
42037 \begin_inset space ~
42041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42043 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42050 \begin_layout Subsection
42058 \begin_layout Standard
42059 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
42060 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
42061 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42063 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
42064 to the clipboard or update the view.
42065 \begin_inset Newline newline
42068 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42072 \begin_layout Standard
42075 Open Containing Directory
42077 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
42078 's temporary folder for the document.
42079 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
42080 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
42081 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
42082 For example some journals require to send the
42086 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
42090 \begin_layout Subsection
42091 Start Appendix Here
42094 \begin_layout Standard
42095 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
42096 as described in section
42097 \begin_inset space ~
42101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42103 reference "sec:Appendices"
42110 \begin_layout Subsection
42112 \begin_inset space ~
42118 \begin_layout Standard
42119 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
42120 default output format for the document (menu
42122 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42123 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42124 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42126 \begin_inset space ~
42130 \begin_inset space ~
42136 \begin_inset space ~
42140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42142 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42146 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
42149 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42150 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42152 \begin_inset space ~
42155 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42157 \begin_inset space ~
42160 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42162 \begin_inset space ~
42166 \begin_inset space ~
42172 \begin_inset space ~
42176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42178 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42182 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
42183 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42185 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42186 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42188 \begin_inset space ~
42191 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42193 \begin_inset space ~
42196 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42200 \begin_inset space ~
42204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42206 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42211 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42212 when it is first configured.
42213 The default output format is
42216 \begin_inset space ~
42224 \begin_layout Subsection
42225 View (Other Formats)
42228 \begin_layout Standard
42229 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
42230 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
42231 actual document with an external program.
42232 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
42233 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42234 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
42236 All possible formats are listed in section
42237 \begin_inset space ~
42241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42243 reference "subsec:Export"
42248 You should at least see the menu entry
42253 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42255 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
42257 \begin_inset space ~
42261 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42263 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42268 \begin_inset Index idx
42271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42272 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42281 \begin_layout Standard
42282 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
42283 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42285 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42286 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42288 \begin_inset space ~
42291 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42293 \begin_inset space ~
42296 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42300 \begin_inset space ~
42304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42306 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42311 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42312 when it is first configured.
42315 \begin_layout Subsection
42317 \begin_inset space ~
42323 \begin_layout Standard
42324 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
42325 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
42328 \begin_layout Subsection
42329 Update (Other Formats)
42332 \begin_layout Standard
42333 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
42334 your document without opening a new viewer window.
42337 \begin_layout Subsection
42338 View Master Document
42341 \begin_layout Standard
42342 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42358 \begin_inset space ~
42363 manual for more information on this topic).
42364 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
42365 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
42369 \begin_inset space ~
42373 \begin_inset space ~
42378 generates the output of the whole book, while
42382 will just output the chapter alone.
42385 \begin_layout Standard
42386 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42387 in the document settings (menu
42389 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42390 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42391 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42393 \begin_inset space ~
42397 \begin_inset space ~
42403 \begin_inset space ~
42407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42409 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42413 ) or in the preferences (menu
42415 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42416 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42418 \begin_inset space ~
42421 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42423 \begin_inset space ~
42426 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42428 \begin_inset space ~
42432 \begin_inset space ~
42438 \begin_inset space ~
42442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42444 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42451 \begin_layout Subsection
42452 Update Master Document
42455 \begin_layout Standard
42456 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42472 \begin_inset space ~
42477 manual for more information on this topic).
42478 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
42479 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
42482 \begin_layout Standard
42483 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42484 in the document settings (menu
42486 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42487 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42488 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42490 \begin_inset space ~
42494 \begin_inset space ~
42500 \begin_inset space ~
42504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42506 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42510 ) or in the preferences (menu
42512 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42513 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42515 \begin_inset space ~
42518 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42520 \begin_inset space ~
42523 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42525 \begin_inset space ~
42529 \begin_inset space ~
42535 \begin_inset space ~
42539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42541 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42548 \begin_layout Subsection
42550 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42552 name "subsec:Compressed"
42559 \begin_layout Standard
42560 Un/compresses the current document.
42561 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
42562 compression (see the
42564 Additional Features
42566 manual for details).
42569 \begin_layout Subsection
42573 \begin_layout Standard
42574 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
42577 \begin_layout Subsection
42581 \begin_layout Standard
42582 The document settings are described in appendix
42583 \begin_inset space ~
42587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42589 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42596 \begin_layout Section
42598 \begin_inset Index idx
42601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42610 \begin_layout Subsection
42614 \begin_layout Standard
42615 Spell checking is explained in section
42616 \begin_inset space ~
42620 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42622 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
42629 \begin_layout Subsection
42633 \begin_layout Standard
42634 The thesaurus is described in section
42635 \begin_inset space ~
42639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42641 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
42648 \begin_layout Subsection
42650 \begin_inset Index idx
42653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42660 \begin_inset Index idx
42663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42672 \begin_layout Standard
42673 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
42674 the highlighted document part.
42677 \begin_layout Subsection
42683 \begin_inset Index idx
42686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42687 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42696 \begin_layout Standard
42697 Generates with the help of the program
42699 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42702 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
42703 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
42704 This feature is not available on Windows.
42707 \begin_layout Subsection
42713 \begin_inset Index idx
42716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42726 \begin_layout Standard
42727 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42732 \begin_inset space ~
42737 to see the full filename paths.
42740 \begin_layout Subsection
42742 \begin_inset Index idx
42745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42754 \begin_layout Standard
42755 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
42756 files as described in section
42757 \begin_inset space ~
42761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42763 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
42770 \begin_layout Subsection
42772 \begin_inset Index idx
42775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42788 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42806 \begin_inset Index idx
42809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42810 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42819 \begin_layout Standard
42820 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
42821 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
42822 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42823 -packages and programs it needs; see
42825 \begin_inset space ~
42829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42831 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42838 \begin_layout Subsection
42842 \begin_layout Standard
42847 dialog as described in detail in appendix
42848 \begin_inset space ~
42852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42854 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42861 \begin_layout Section
42863 \begin_inset Index idx
42866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42875 \begin_layout Standard
42876 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
42877 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
42879 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
42883 \begin_layout Standard
42887 \begin_inset space ~
42892 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
42893 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42894 packages and classes found
42895 by \SpecialChar LyX
42897 \begin_inset space ~
42901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42903 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
42910 \begin_layout Standard
42914 \begin_inset space ~
42919 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
42924 \begin_layout Section
42926 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42928 name "sec:Toolbars"
42935 \begin_layout Standard
42936 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
42937 \begin_inset space ~
42941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42943 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
42950 \begin_layout Standard
42951 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
42952 This is described in the
42954 Additional Features
42959 \begin_layout Subsection
42961 \begin_inset Index idx
42964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42973 \begin_layout Standard
42974 \begin_inset Graphics
42975 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
42983 \begin_layout Standard
42984 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42990 \begin_layout Standard
42991 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43008 \begin_inset Note Note
43011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43012 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
43017 manual for more information.
43025 \begin_layout Standard
43026 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43032 \begin_layout Standard
43033 \begin_inset Tabular
43034 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
43035 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43036 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43037 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43043 \begin_inset Graphics
43044 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
43054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43058 pull-down box for the environments
43071 \begin_layout Standard
43072 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
43078 \begin_layout Standard
43080 \begin_inset Tabular
43081 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
43082 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43083 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43084 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43085 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43108 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43115 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43138 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43145 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43168 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43175 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43184 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
43192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43198 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43205 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43214 arg "spelling-continuously"
43222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43226 Spellcheck continuously
43232 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43255 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43262 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43285 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43292 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43315 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43322 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43345 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43352 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43375 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43377 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
43382 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43391 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43400 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
43408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43414 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43420 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43424 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43433 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43440 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
43448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43454 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43456 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43460 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43464 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43473 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43482 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
43490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43496 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43497 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
43504 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43525 Emphasize text, function of the
43526 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
43529 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43531 \begin_inset space ~
43534 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43536 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
43542 arg "dialog-show character"
43553 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43574 Set text to noun style, function of the
43575 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
43578 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43580 \begin_inset space ~
43583 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43585 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
43591 arg "dialog-show character"
43602 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43608 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
43611 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
43619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43624 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
43627 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43634 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43640 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
43645 arg "textstyle-apply"
43655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43660 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
43661 Format text using the current settings in the
43663 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43665 \begin_inset space ~
43668 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43679 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43702 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43703 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
43705 \begin_inset space ~
43714 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43723 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
43731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43737 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43744 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43751 arg "tabular-insert"
43759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43765 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43772 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43778 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
43781 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
43789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43794 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
43797 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43804 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43813 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
43821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43825 Toggle outline window on/off,
43827 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43834 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43843 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
43851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43855 Toggle math toolbar on/off
43861 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43870 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
43878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43882 Toggle table toolbar on/off
43895 \begin_layout Subsection
43897 \begin_inset Index idx
43900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43909 \begin_layout Standard
43910 \begin_inset Graphics
43911 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
43919 \begin_layout Standard
43920 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43926 \begin_layout Standard
43927 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43931 \begin_layout Standard
43932 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43938 \begin_layout Standard
43939 \begin_inset Tabular
43940 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
43941 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43942 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43943 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43944 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43971 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43980 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
43988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43998 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44007 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
44015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44025 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44034 arg "layout-toggle List"
44042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44052 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44061 arg "layout-toggle Description"
44069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44079 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44088 arg "depth-increment"
44096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44102 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44104 \begin_inset space ~
44108 \begin_inset space ~
44117 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44126 arg "depth-decrement"
44134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44140 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44142 \begin_inset space ~
44146 \begin_inset space ~
44155 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44164 arg "float-insert figure"
44172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44178 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44179 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44186 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44195 arg "float-insert table"
44203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44209 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44210 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44217 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44240 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44247 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44256 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
44264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44270 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44277 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44286 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
44294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44300 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44307 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44330 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44332 \begin_inset space ~
44341 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44350 arg "nomencl-insert"
44358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44364 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44366 \begin_inset space ~
44375 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44384 arg "footnote-insert"
44392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44398 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44405 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44414 arg "marginalnote-insert"
44422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44428 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44430 \begin_inset space ~
44439 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44462 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44463 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
44465 \begin_inset space ~
44474 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44483 arg "box-insert Frameless"
44491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44497 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44504 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44527 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44534 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44557 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44559 \begin_inset space ~
44568 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44577 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
44585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44591 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44592 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
44599 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44608 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
44616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44622 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44623 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44625 \begin_inset space ~
44634 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44643 arg "dialog-show character"
44651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44657 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44659 \begin_inset space ~
44662 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44669 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44675 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
44680 arg "textstyle-apply"
44688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44693 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
44694 Format text using the recent settings in the
44697 arg "dialog-show character"
44706 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44715 arg "layout-paragraph"
44723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44729 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44731 \begin_inset space ~
44740 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44749 arg "thesaurus-entry"
44757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44763 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44777 \begin_layout Subsection
44778 View/Update Toolbar
44779 \begin_inset Index idx
44782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44783 Toolbar ! View / Update
44791 \begin_layout Standard
44792 \begin_inset Graphics
44793 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
44800 \begin_layout Standard
44801 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44807 \begin_layout Standard
44808 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44812 \begin_layout Standard
44813 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44819 \begin_layout Standard
44820 \begin_inset Tabular
44821 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
44822 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44823 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44824 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44825 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44848 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44855 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44864 arg "buffer-update"
44872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44878 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44885 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44894 arg "master-buffer-view"
44902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44908 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44910 \begin_inset space ~
44919 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44928 arg "master-buffer-update"
44936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44942 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44944 \begin_inset space ~
44948 \begin_inset space ~
44957 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44966 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
44974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44980 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44981 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44982 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44983 Synchronize with Output
44989 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45000 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
45010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45016 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45017 View (Other Formats)
45023 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45030 arg "update-others"
45034 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
45042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45048 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45049 Update (Other Formats)
45062 \begin_layout Standard
45064 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
45065 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
45071 \begin_layout Subsection
45075 \begin_layout Standard
45076 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
45077 \begin_inset space ~
45081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45083 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
45087 , the table toolbar
45088 \begin_inset Index idx
45091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45100 \begin_inset space ~
45105 manual and the math macro toolbar
45106 \begin_inset Index idx
45109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45122 \begin_layout Chapter
45123 The Document Settings
45124 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45126 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
45131 \begin_inset Index idx
45134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45135 Document ! Settings
45143 \begin_layout Standard
45147 \begin_inset space ~
45152 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
45153 is called with the menu
45155 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45159 You can save your document settings as default with the
45161 Save as Document Defaults
45163 button in any dialog.
45164 This will create a template named
45168 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
45169 when you create a new document without
45173 \begin_layout Standard
45178 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
45179 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
45182 \begin_layout Standard
45183 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
45184 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
45185 to find the one you are looking for.
45186 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
45187 the submenus of the dialog.
45189 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45193 \begin_inset space \space{}
45197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45204 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
45205 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
45206 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
45209 \begin_layout Section
45213 \begin_layout Standard
45214 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
45216 Document classes are described in section
45217 \begin_inset space ~
45221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45223 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
45231 \begin_layout Standard
45235 \begin_inset space ~
45240 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
45245 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
45246 as a layout for a document class.
45247 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
45249 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
45258 \begin_layout Standard
45259 Some classes use special class options by default.
45260 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
45264 and you can decide to use them or not.
45265 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
45266 recommended you leave them untouched.
45271 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45272 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
45277 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45279 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
45284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45285 When you want to use one of the following drivers
45286 \begin_inset Newline newline
45291 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
45294 \begin_inset Newline newline
45297 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45298 distribution, see section
45303 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45305 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
45318 \begin_layout Standard
45323 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
45324 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
45325 in the background if the child document
45326 is opened without its master.
45327 This way child documents are always compilable.
45328 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
45335 \begin_inset space ~
45343 \begin_layout Standard
45344 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45355 \begin_inset Index idx
45358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45360 packages ! prettyref
45366 \begin_inset Index idx
45369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45371 packages ! refstyle
45376 for cross-references, see section
45377 \begin_inset space ~
45381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45383 reference "sec:Cross-References"
45390 \begin_layout Section
45394 \begin_layout Standard
45395 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
45396 Please refer to the section
45399 \begin_inset space ~
45407 \begin_inset space ~
45412 manual for details.
45415 \begin_layout Section
45419 \begin_layout Standard
45420 Modules are explained in section
45421 \begin_inset space ~
45425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45427 reference "subsec:Modules"
45434 \begin_layout Section
45438 \begin_layout Standard
45440 \begin_inset space ~
45444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45446 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
45453 \begin_layout Section
45457 \begin_layout Standard
45458 The document font settings are described in section
45459 \begin_inset space ~
45463 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45465 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
45472 \begin_layout Section
45476 \begin_layout Standard
45477 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
45489 \begin_inset space ~
45494 and whether it should be a
45497 \begin_inset space ~
45502 can also be specified here.
45505 \begin_layout Standard
45506 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
45507 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
45508 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
45510 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
45513 \begin_layout Standard
45516 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
45519 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
45520 justifies the text on screen.
45521 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
45523 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
45527 \begin_layout Standard
45529 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
45538 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
45543 \begin_layout Section
45547 \begin_layout Standard
45548 This dialog is described in sections
45549 \begin_inset space ~
45553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45555 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
45560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45562 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
45569 \begin_layout Section
45573 \begin_layout Standard
45574 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
45575 \begin_inset space ~
45579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45581 reference "subsec:Margins"
45588 \begin_layout Section
45590 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45592 name "sec:Language-encodings"
45597 \begin_inset Index idx
45600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45601 Language ! Encoding
45609 \begin_layout Standard
45610 The document language and quote styles are set here.
45611 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
45612 (the \SpecialChar LyX
45614 is always encoded in utf8).
45615 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
45616 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
45617 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45618 -command is not known for
45619 a particular character).
45620 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
45624 \begin_layout Standard
45626 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
45627 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
45628 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
45629 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
45630 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
45631 's default encoding).
45632 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
45633 's Unicode support covers the
45634 characters of most scripts.
45635 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
45636 using one of the traditional, or
45637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45644 , encodings is necessary.
45647 \begin_layout Standard
45649 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
45651 provides support for these traditional encodings.
45654 Traditional (auto-selected)
45660 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
45661 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
45662 the given language(s).
45664 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45668 \begin_layout Standard
45670 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45671 If you use the option
45676 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
45679 If the document contains text in more than one language you
45680 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
45683 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45686 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
45687 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
45688 exactly one encoding.
45689 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
45694 \begin_layout Standard
45696 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
45697 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
45703 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
45704 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45708 \begin_layout Standard
45710 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
45711 Finally, you can also select
45715 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
45716 Note that this encoding is then used for
45721 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
45722 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
45726 \begin_layout Standard
45728 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
45731 Do not load inputenc
45733 checkbox does what it states: It prevents \SpecialChar LyX
45734 from automatically loading the
45741 \begin_inset Index idx
45744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45746 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
45748 packages ! inputenc
45754 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
45755 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
45756 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45757 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45758 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45760 Note that this option is only available for the standard
45766 Traditional (auto-selected)
45773 \begin_layout Standard
45775 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
45777 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
45778 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
45779 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45780 installation supports Unicode), choose
45781 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
45782 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45783 is quite incomplete, so
45784 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
45789 (when \SpecialChar LyX
45790 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45791 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
45792 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45793 -commands is not used, because all
45794 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
45795 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45796 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45797 , two new alternative engines
45798 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45800 Both engines support Unicode natively.
45802 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
45805 \begin_inset space ~
45813 \begin_inset space ~
45821 \begin_inset space ~
45827 \begin_inset space ~
45831 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45833 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
45838 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
45842 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
45847 \begin_layout Standard
45851 \begin_inset space ~
45856 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45857 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
45859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45867 The possible settings are:
45870 \begin_layout Description
45871 Default uses the language package that is selected in
45873 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45874 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45878 \begin_inset space ~
45882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45884 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
45891 \begin_layout Description
45892 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
45893 format you will use.
45894 In many cases this will be
45899 \begin_inset Index idx
45902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45910 If the newer package
45915 \begin_inset Index idx
45918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45920 packages ! polyglossia
45925 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45926 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45927 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
45929 this package will be used instead of
45936 \begin_layout Description
45938 \begin_inset space ~
45949 would be more appropriate.
45952 \begin_layout Description
45953 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
45954 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
45958 (for German texts), type in
45961 \begin_inset Newline newline
45966 usepackage{ngerman}
45969 \begin_layout Description
45970 None will not use a language package.
45971 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
45974 \begin_layout Standard
45975 Here is a list with the important encodings:
45978 \begin_layout Description
45980 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
45982 \begin_inset space ~
45986 \begin_inset space ~
45990 \begin_inset space ~
45997 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46003 \begin_inset Index idx
46006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46008 packages ! inputenc
46014 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
46015 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
46016 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
46022 \begin_layout Description
46023 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
46025 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
46026 commands, which may result in a big
46027 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
46028 -commands are needed.
46030 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596221
46031 This is the same as the
46044 \begin_layout Description
46046 \begin_inset space ~
46050 \begin_inset space ~
46053 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
46056 \begin_layout Description
46058 \begin_inset space ~
46062 \begin_inset space ~
46065 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
46068 \begin_layout Description
46070 \begin_inset space ~
46073 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
46076 \begin_layout Description
46078 \begin_inset space ~
46082 \begin_inset space ~
46085 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
46086 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
46089 \begin_layout Description
46091 \begin_inset space ~
46095 \begin_inset space ~
46098 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
46102 \begin_layout Description
46104 \begin_inset space ~
46108 \begin_inset space ~
46111 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
46112 ISO-8859-13 encoding
46115 \begin_layout Description
46117 \begin_inset space ~
46121 \begin_inset space ~
46125 \begin_inset space ~
46128 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
46129 \begin_inset space ~
46135 \begin_layout Description
46137 \begin_inset space ~
46141 \begin_inset space ~
46145 \begin_inset space ~
46148 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
46149 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
46152 \begin_layout Description
46154 \begin_inset space ~
46158 \begin_inset space ~
46161 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
46162 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
46163 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46164 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
46165 \begin_inset space ~
46169 \begin_inset space ~
46175 \begin_layout Description
46177 \begin_inset space ~
46181 \begin_inset space ~
46184 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
46185 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
46186 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46188 should try to use the encoding Unicode
46189 \begin_inset space ~
46193 \begin_inset space ~
46199 \begin_layout Description
46201 \begin_inset space ~
46205 \begin_inset space ~
46208 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
46211 \begin_layout Description
46213 \begin_inset space ~
46217 \begin_inset space ~
46220 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
46223 \begin_layout Description
46225 \begin_inset space ~
46229 \begin_inset space ~
46232 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
46235 \begin_layout Description
46237 \begin_inset space ~
46240 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
46243 \begin_layout Description
46245 \begin_inset space ~
46248 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
46251 \begin_layout Description
46253 \begin_inset space ~
46257 \begin_inset space ~
46260 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
46263 \begin_layout Description
46265 \begin_inset space ~
46269 \begin_inset space ~
46275 \begin_layout Description
46277 \begin_inset space ~
46281 \begin_inset space ~
46284 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
46287 \begin_layout Description
46289 \begin_inset space ~
46293 \begin_inset space ~
46299 \begin_layout Description
46301 \begin_inset space ~
46305 \begin_inset space ~
46308 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46314 \begin_inset Index idx
46317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46324 , when using this, set the document language to
46329 \begin_layout Description
46331 \begin_inset space ~
46335 \begin_inset space ~
46338 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46343 , when using this, set the document language to
46346 \begin_inset space ~
46352 \begin_layout Description
46354 \begin_inset space ~
46358 \begin_inset space ~
46361 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46367 \begin_inset Index idx
46370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46372 packages ! japanese
46377 , when using this, set the document language to
46382 \begin_layout Description
46384 \begin_inset space ~
46388 \begin_inset space ~
46391 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46396 , when using this, set the document language to
46401 \begin_layout Description
46403 \begin_inset space ~
46407 \begin_inset space ~
46410 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46415 , when using this, set the document language to
46420 \begin_layout Description
46422 \begin_inset space ~
46425 (EUC-KR) for Korean
46428 \begin_layout Description
46430 \begin_inset space ~
46434 \begin_inset space ~
46438 \begin_inset space ~
46441 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
46444 \begin_layout Description
46446 \begin_inset space ~
46450 \begin_inset space ~
46454 \begin_inset space ~
46457 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
46458 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
46459 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
46462 \begin_layout Description
46464 \begin_inset space ~
46468 \begin_inset space ~
46474 \begin_layout Description
46476 \begin_inset space ~
46480 \begin_inset space ~
46483 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
46484 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
46487 \begin_layout Description
46489 \begin_inset space ~
46493 \begin_inset space ~
46496 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46502 \begin_inset Index idx
46505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46512 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
46513 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
46515 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46516 with the default encoding (
46518 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46524 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
46525 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46530 \begin_layout Description
46532 \begin_inset space ~
46540 \begin_inset space ~
46543 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
46550 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46553 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46560 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46561 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46563 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46566 \begin_layout Description
46568 \begin_inset space ~
46572 \begin_inset space ~
46575 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46581 \begin_inset Index idx
46584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46592 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
46595 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
46597 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
46598 This used to be more comprehensive than
46601 \begin_inset space ~
46606 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
46611 \begin_layout Description
46613 \begin_inset space ~
46616 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46622 \begin_inset Index idx
46625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46627 packages ! inputenc
46634 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
46635 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
46637 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
46638 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46639 with the default encoding (
46641 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46647 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
46648 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46653 \begin_layout Description
46655 \begin_inset space ~
46659 \begin_inset space ~
46663 \begin_inset space ~
46666 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
46667 \begin_inset space ~
46673 \begin_layout Description
46675 \begin_inset space ~
46679 \begin_inset space ~
46683 \begin_inset space ~
46686 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
46687 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
46688 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
46692 \begin_layout Description
46694 \begin_inset space ~
46698 \begin_inset space ~
46702 \begin_inset space ~
46705 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
46706 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
46709 \begin_layout Section
46711 \begin_inset Index idx
46714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46721 \begin_inset Index idx
46724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46731 \begin_inset Index idx
46734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46735 Color ! Shaded boxes
46741 \begin_inset Index idx
46744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46745 Color ! Greyed-out notes
46753 \begin_layout Standard
46754 Here you can alter the font color for the
46758 (default: black), for
46761 \begin_inset space ~
46766 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
46770 (default: white) and for
46773 \begin_inset space ~
46783 sets the color back to the default.
46786 \begin_layout Standard
46787 Clicking any button showing
46795 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
46796 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
46797 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
46798 later more quickly.
46801 \begin_layout Standard
46802 Note, if you change the
46805 \begin_inset space ~
46810 font color and use the option
46813 \begin_inset space ~
46818 in the document settings under
46821 \begin_inset space ~
46826 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
46827 \begin_inset space ~
46831 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46833 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
46840 \begin_layout Standard
46841 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
46847 \begin_layout Standard
46851 \begin_inset space ~
46860 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
46863 \begin_inset space ~
46866 Code after a forced page break:
46869 \begin_layout Itemize
46870 For the page color:
46871 \begin_inset Newline newline
46878 pagecolor{color name}
46881 \begin_layout Itemize
46882 For the text color:
46883 \begin_inset Newline newline
46893 \begin_layout Standard
46894 You are restricted to one of
46930 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
46937 \begin_inset space ~
46943 \begin_inset Newline newline
46946 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
46947 names to refer to them:
46950 \begin_layout Itemize
46956 \begin_inset Newline newline
46961 page_backgroundcolor
46964 \begin_layout Itemize
46968 \begin_inset space ~
46974 \begin_inset Newline newline
46982 \begin_layout Itemize
46986 \begin_inset space ~
46992 \begin_inset Newline newline
47000 \begin_layout Itemize
47004 \begin_inset space ~
47010 \begin_inset Newline newline
47018 \begin_layout Standard
47019 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
47022 \begin_inset space ~
47030 \begin_inset space ~
47038 \begin_layout Section
47040 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
47044 \begin_layout Standard
47046 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
47047 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
47048 \begin_inset space ~
47052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47054 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47062 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
47063 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
47066 \begin_layout Standard
47068 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
47069 Additionally, you can advise LyX to place a change bar in the margin of
47071 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
47074 \begin_layout Section
47078 \begin_layout Standard
47079 Here you can adjust the
47083 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
47087 as described in section
47088 \begin_inset space ~
47092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47094 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
47099 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
47103 \begin_layout Standard
47105 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
47106 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
47108 The functionality is handled by package lineno and and additional options
47109 of this package can be used as well.
47110 The most common one are:
47113 \begin_layout Description
47115 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
47116 right Line numbers to the right margin
47119 \begin_layout Description
47121 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
47122 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
47126 \begin_layout Description
47128 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
47129 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
47132 \begin_layout Description
47134 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620780
47135 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
47138 \begin_layout Description
47140 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
47142 \begin_inset space ~
47145 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
47150 \begin_layout Section
47154 \begin_layout Standard
47155 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47161 \begin_inset Index idx
47164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47166 packages ! biblatex
47176 \begin_inset Index idx
47179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47191 \begin_inset Index idx
47194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47202 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47205 Sectioned bibliography
47207 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47213 \begin_inset Index idx
47216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47218 packages ! bibtopic
47228 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
47229 Finally, you can select a document-specific
47233 for the generation of the bibliography.
47234 For a further description of these possibilities see section
47235 \begin_inset space ~
47239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47241 reference "sec:Bibliography"
47248 \begin_layout Section
47252 \begin_layout Standard
47253 Here you can define the
47257 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
47259 \begin_inset space ~
47263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47265 reference "sec:Index"
47272 \begin_layout Section
47276 \begin_layout Standard
47277 The PDF properties are explained in section
47278 \begin_inset space ~
47282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47284 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47291 \begin_layout Section
47295 \begin_layout Standard
47296 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
47297 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47303 \begin_inset Index idx
47306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47318 \begin_inset Index idx
47321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47333 \begin_inset Index idx
47336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47348 \begin_inset Index idx
47351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47363 \begin_inset Index idx
47366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47368 packages ! mathdots
47378 \begin_inset Index idx
47381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47383 packages ! mathtools
47393 \begin_inset Index idx
47396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47408 \begin_inset Index idx
47411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47413 packages ! stackrel
47423 \begin_inset Index idx
47426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47428 packages ! stmaryrd
47438 \begin_inset Index idx
47441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47443 packages ! undertilde
47448 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
47451 \begin_layout Description
47452 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47453 -errors in formulas,
47454 ensure that you have this enabled.
47457 \begin_layout Description
47458 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
47459 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47460 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
47464 \begin_layout Description
47465 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
47468 \begin_inset space ~
47480 \begin_layout Description
47481 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
47484 \begin_inset space ~
47496 \begin_layout Description
47497 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
47508 \begin_layout Description
47509 mathtools is used for the math commands
47545 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
47552 \begin_layout Description
47553 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
47555 Chemical Symbols and Equations
47564 \begin_layout Description
47565 stackrel is used for the math command
47582 \begin_layout Description
47583 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
47586 \begin_layout Description
47587 undertilde is used for the math command
47595 Accents for one Character
47604 \begin_layout Section
47606 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
47608 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
47614 \begin_layout Standard
47616 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
47617 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
47620 \begin_layout Standard
47622 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
47623 The float placement options
47624 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
47627 are described in the section
47630 \begin_inset space ~
47634 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
47636 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
47644 \begin_inset space ~
47652 \begin_layout Section
47656 \begin_layout Standard
47657 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
47659 Program Code Listings
47664 \begin_inset space ~
47672 \begin_layout Section
47676 \begin_layout Standard
47677 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
47685 set to be used and set the
47690 The itemize environment is described in section
47691 \begin_inset space ~
47695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47697 reference "sec:Itemize"
47704 \begin_layout Standard
47705 You can furthermore specify a
47708 \begin_inset space ~
47713 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47714 command of the desired character.
47715 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
47722 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
47724 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47728 \begin_inset space \space{}
47732 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
47742 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
47743 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
47746 \begin_layout Standard
47747 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47755 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47756 -packages in the preamble (menu
47759 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47760 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47763 \begin_inset space ~
47769 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
47773 usepackage{textcomp}
47776 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
47780 usepackage{amssymb}
47790 \begin_layout Section
47794 \begin_layout Standard
47795 Branches are described in section
47796 \begin_inset space ~
47800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47802 reference "sec:Branches"
47809 \begin_layout Section
47811 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47813 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
47820 \begin_layout Standard
47821 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
47824 \begin_layout Description
47826 \begin_inset space ~
47830 \begin_inset space ~
47833 Format: The format that is used when you enter
47834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47853 View Master Document
47854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47861 Update Master Document
47862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47869 menu or the toolbar.
47870 The default is set in
47872 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47873 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47875 \begin_inset space ~
47878 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
47882 \begin_inset space ~
47886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47888 reference "sec:File-Formats"
47895 \begin_layout Description
47897 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
47899 \begin_inset space ~
47903 \begin_inset space ~
47907 \begin_inset space ~
47910 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
47915 option which is needed with some packages.
47916 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
47917 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
47920 \begin_layout Description
47922 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
47924 \begin_inset space ~
47928 \begin_inset space ~
47931 Options offers settings for the
47939 \begin_layout Itemize
47943 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
47945 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
47947 \begin_inset space ~
47953 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
47955 \begin_inset space ~
47959 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
47965 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
47967 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
47968 settings for the menu
47970 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47974 \begin_inset space ~
47978 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
47981 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
47982 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
47987 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
47989 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
47991 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
47994 or a detailed description see section
47996 Reverse DVI/PDF search
48001 \begin_inset space ~
48007 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
48011 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
48015 \begin_layout Itemize
48017 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
48020 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
48022 determines whether so-called
48023 \begin_inset Quotes els
48027 \begin_inset Quotes ers
48031 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
48033 \begin_inset Quotes els
48037 \begin_inset Quotes ers
48040 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
48041 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
48042 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
48044 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
48046 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
48047 macros, you can uncheck this.
48048 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
48055 \begin_layout Description
48057 \begin_inset space ~
48061 \begin_inset space ~
48064 Options offers settings for the export format
48072 \begin_inset space ~
48077 will assure that the output follows exactly version
48078 \begin_inset space ~
48081 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
48085 \begin_inset space ~
48090 settings are described in detail in section
48092 Math Output in XHTML
48097 \begin_inset space ~
48106 \begin_inset space ~
48110 \begin_inset space ~
48115 is used for the size of equations in the output.
48118 \begin_layout Description
48120 \begin_inset space ~
48125 Save transient properties
48127 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
48128 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
48129 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
48133 \begin_layout Itemize
48134 the activation of change tracking
48137 \begin_layout Itemize
48138 the output of tracked changes
48141 \begin_layout Itemize
48142 the recording of the document directory path.
48145 \begin_layout Standard
48146 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
48147 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
48151 \begin_layout Section
48159 \begin_layout Standard
48160 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48162 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
48164 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
48166 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
48170 \begin_layout Standard
48171 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48172 -syntax is given in section
48173 \begin_inset space ~
48177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48179 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
48186 \begin_layout Chapter
48192 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48194 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
48199 \begin_inset Index idx
48202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48211 \begin_layout Standard
48212 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
48214 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48218 It has the following submenus.
48221 \begin_layout Section
48225 \begin_layout Subsection
48229 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48230 User Interface File
48231 \begin_inset Index idx
48234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48235 Customization ! of toolbars
48241 \begin_inset Index idx
48244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48245 Customization ! of menus
48253 \begin_layout Standard
48254 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
48255 interface (ui) file.
48256 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
48264 \begin_layout Description
48269 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
48272 \begin_layout Description
48279 the menu entries in popup context menus
48282 \begin_layout Description
48287 specifies the toolbar buttons
48290 \begin_layout Standard
48291 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
48292 and edit the entries.
48295 \begin_layout Standard
48296 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
48308 entries must be finished with an explicit
48333 and in the case of the
48334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48346 The syntax for the entries is:
48349 \begin_layout Standard
48350 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48379 \begin_layout Standard
48381 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48384 All the \SpecialChar LyX
48385 -functions are listed in the menu
48387 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
48389 \begin_inset space ~
48397 \begin_layout Standard
48398 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48404 \begin_layout Standard
48405 For example, assuming you use the menu
48407 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48410 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
48414 \begin_layout Standard
48415 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48439 \begin_layout Standard
48441 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48456 to have the sixth bookmark.
48459 \begin_layout Standard
48463 \begin_inset space ~
48468 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
48469 's toolbar buttons.
48470 The currently available icon sets are compared in
48471 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48474 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
48482 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48486 \begin_layout Standard
48489 Enable tool tips in main work area
48491 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
48495 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48499 \begin_layout Standard
48504 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
48505 should display in the menu
48507 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48509 \begin_inset space ~
48517 \begin_layout Subsection
48521 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48525 \begin_layout Standard
48528 Restore window layouts and geometries
48531 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
48532 the last \SpecialChar LyX
48536 \begin_layout Standard
48539 Restore cursor positions
48541 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
48545 \begin_layout Standard
48548 Load opened files from last session
48550 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
48554 \begin_layout Standard
48557 Clear all session information
48559 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
48560 sessions (cursor positions, names
48561 of last opened documents, etc.).
48564 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48566 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48568 name "subsec:Backup documents"
48573 \begin_inset Index idx
48576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48585 \begin_layout Standard
48588 Backup original documents when saving
48590 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
48591 it was saved the last time.
48592 It is stored in the
48595 \begin_inset space ~
48601 \begin_inset space ~
48605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48607 reference "sec:Paths"
48611 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
48614 \begin_inset space ~
48620 The backup file has the file extension
48621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48635 \begin_layout Standard
48638 Backup documents, every
48640 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
48643 \begin_layout Standard
48646 Save documents compressed by default
48648 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
48649 \begin_inset space ~
48653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48655 reference "subsec:Compressed"
48660 This applies to newly created documents only.
48661 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
48664 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48665 Windows & work area
48668 \begin_layout Standard
48671 Open documents in tabs
48673 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
48677 \begin_layout Standard
48682 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
48687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48689 \begin_inset space ~
48693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48695 reference "sec:Paths"
48699 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
48706 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
48707 documents will be opened in the same running instance
48708 of \SpecialChar LyX
48710 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
48711 instance is created for each file.
48714 \begin_layout Standard
48717 Single close-tab button
48719 is checked, there will only be one close button (
48729 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
48730 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
48731 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
48735 \begin_layout Standard
48736 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48744 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
48745 before the change takes effect.
48753 \begin_layout Standard
48758 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
48760 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
48762 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
48766 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
48767 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
48768 and only want to close the view in once instance.
48771 \begin_layout Subsection
48773 \begin_inset Index idx
48776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48783 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48785 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
48792 \begin_layout Standard
48793 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
48797 \begin_layout Standard
48798 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48806 This section only deals with the fonts
48810 the \SpecialChar LyX
48812 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
48815 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48816 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48827 \begin_layout Standard
48828 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
48845 (depends on the system) as its
48848 \begin_inset space ~
48864 \begin_layout Standard
48865 You can change the font size with the
48872 \begin_layout Standard
48877 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
48879 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48882 points have the size of 1
48883 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48887 \begin_inset space ~
48891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48893 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
48898 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
48899 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48903 The sizes are explained in detail in section
48904 \begin_inset space ~
48908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48910 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
48917 \begin_layout Subsection
48919 \begin_inset Index idx
48922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48923 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
48930 \begin_inset Index idx
48933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48942 \begin_layout Standard
48943 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
48944 by choosing an item in the
48945 list and selecting the
48952 \begin_layout Standard
48953 By checking the option
48957 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
48960 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
48961 \begin_inset space ~
48965 \begin_inset space ~
48970 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
48973 \begin_layout Subsection
48975 \begin_inset Index idx
48978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48987 \begin_layout Standard
48988 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
48992 \begin_layout Standard
48997 enables previewing snippets of your document.
48998 This feature is described in section
48999 \begin_inset space ~
49003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49005 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
49012 \begin_layout Standard
49013 Checking the option
49016 \begin_inset space ~
49020 \begin_inset space ~
49024 \begin_inset space ~
49029 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
49032 \begin_layout Section
49034 \begin_inset Index idx
49037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49046 \begin_layout Subsection
49050 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49054 \begin_layout Standard
49057 Cursor follows scrollbar
49059 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
49063 \begin_layout Standard
49064 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
49065 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
49066 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
49069 \begin_layout Standard
49072 Scroll below end of document
49074 is self-explanatory.
49077 \begin_layout Standard
49078 In \SpecialChar LyX
49079 one can jump from word to word by pressing
49086 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
49088 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
49089 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
49090 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
49094 \begin_layout Standard
49096 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924785
49099 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
49101 is for users who don't want tracked changes to be dissolved on copy and
49102 paste operations (i.
49103 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49106 e., inserted as new text with the deletions removed).
49107 If this is checked, the change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as
49108 is, independent if changes are currently tracked or not.
49109 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
49110 dissolving from insets.
49115 \begin_layout Standard
49118 Sort environments alphabetically
49120 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
49123 \begin_layout Standard
49126 Group environments by their category
49128 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
49131 \begin_layout Standard
49136 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
49147 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49151 \begin_layout Standard
49152 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
49157 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
49158 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
49162 \begin_layout Subsection
49164 \begin_inset Index idx
49167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49174 \begin_inset Index idx
49177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49178 Settings ! Shortcuts
49186 \begin_layout Standard
49191 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
49193 Several binding files are available, among them:
49196 \begin_layout Description
49197 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
49200 \begin_layout Description
49201 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
49213 \begin_layout Description
49214 mac.bind a set of bindings for
49217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49225 \begin_layout Standard
49226 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
49231 , and binding files for special languages.
49232 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
49233 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49237 \begin_inset space \space{}
49241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49249 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
49250 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
49251 will try to use the appropriate binding
49255 \begin_layout Standard
49256 Some binding files, like
49260 , only have a limited scope.
49261 When looking at the end of the file
49265 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
49268 \begin_layout Standard
49272 \begin_inset space ~
49276 \begin_inset space ~
49281 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
49282 in the selected key binding file.
49285 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49287 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49289 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
49294 \begin_inset Index idx
49297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49298 Key Bindings ! Editing
49306 \begin_layout Standard
49307 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
49308 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
49309 functions and the bound shortcuts.
49310 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
49313 Show key-bindings containing
49316 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
49317 Insert there for example as keyword
49318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49325 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
49326 functions that contain
49327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49335 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
49336 All \SpecialChar LyX
49337 functions are also listed in the file
49342 that you will find in the
49349 \begin_layout Standard
49350 For example, to add the shortcut
49358 , select the function and press the
49363 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
49364 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
49367 \begin_layout Standard
49368 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
49369 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
49371 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
49372 function names as a semicolon separated list.
49374 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
49379 \begin_layout Standard
49380 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
49383 \begin_layout Standard
49384 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
49386 The syntax of the entries is:
49389 \begin_layout Standard
49395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49414 \begin_layout Standard
49415 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
49416 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
49417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49444 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
49445 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
49446 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
49447 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
49449 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
49453 , you needed to specify it as
49458 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
49461 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
49464 \begin_layout Subsection
49466 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49468 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
49473 \begin_inset Index idx
49476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49483 \begin_inset Index idx
49486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49487 Settings ! Keyboard Map
49495 \begin_layout Standard
49496 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
49497 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
49498 provides keyboard maps.
49499 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
49500 is a Romanian one, you can enable
49503 \begin_inset space ~
49507 \begin_inset space ~
49512 and select the keyboard map file named
49519 \begin_layout Standard
49528 keyboard map and, if you use the
49532 bindings, you can select the first and second with
49535 arg "keymap-primary"
49541 arg "keymap-secondary"
49544 respectively or toggle between them with
49547 arg "keymap-toggle"
49553 \begin_layout Standard
49554 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49562 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
49571 \begin_layout Standard
49572 You can also specify the mouse
49574 Wheel scrolling speed
49577 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
49581 Middle mouse button pasting
49583 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
49584 inserts the content of the clipboard.
49587 \begin_layout Standard
49595 \begin_inset space ~
49599 \begin_inset space ~
49604 you can select a key for zooming.
49605 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
49608 \begin_layout Subsection
49612 \begin_layout Standard
49613 Input completion is described in section
49614 \begin_inset space ~
49618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49620 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
49627 \begin_layout Section
49629 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49636 \begin_inset Index idx
49639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49646 \begin_inset Index idx
49649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49658 \begin_layout Standard
49659 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
49660 are normally determined during
49662 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
49665 \begin_layout Description
49667 \begin_inset space ~
49670 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
49671 's working directory.
49672 It is the default when you
49683 \begin_inset space ~
49691 \begin_layout Description
49693 \begin_inset space ~
49696 templates This directory
49697 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
49698 contains the templates that are shown
49699 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
49700 will be opened when you use the menu
49701 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
49706 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49708 \begin_inset space ~
49712 \begin_inset space ~
49720 \begin_layout Description
49722 \begin_inset space ~
49725 files This directory
49726 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
49727 will be opened when you use the
49728 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
49729 contains the example files that are listed in
49732 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
49741 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49743 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
49745 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
49751 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
49753 \begin_inset Newline newline
49757 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49769 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
49770 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
49780 \begin_layout Description
49782 \begin_inset space ~
49786 \begin_inset Index idx
49789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49795 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
49796 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
49797 \begin_inset space ~
49801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49803 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
49811 will be used to save the backups.
49812 \begin_inset Newline newline
49815 Backup files have the ending
49816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49826 \begin_layout Description
49828 \begin_inset space ~
49831 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
49832 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
49834 \begin_inset Newline newline
49841 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49847 You can edit this file with the program
49856 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
49857 in its preferences under
49860 \begin_inset space ~
49866 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
49871 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
49873 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
49874 in your \SpecialChar LyX
49880 and \SpecialChar LyX
49881 need to be running the same time.
49882 \begin_inset Newline newline
49885 The pipe is also used for the
49889 feature, see section
49890 \begin_inset space ~
49894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49896 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
49901 \begin_inset Newline newline
49904 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
49905 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
49906 \begin_inset Newline newline
49922 \begin_layout Description
49924 \begin_inset space ~
49927 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
49930 \begin_layout Description
49932 \begin_inset space ~
49935 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
49936 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
49937 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
49940 \begin_layout Description
49942 \begin_inset space ~
49945 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
49951 You only need to specify it if you are using
49955 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
49957 For \SpecialChar LyX
49962 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
49966 \begin_layout Description
49968 \begin_inset space ~
49971 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
49972 When \SpecialChar LyX
49973 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
49974 to find it on the system.
49975 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
49977 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
49979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49983 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49986 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
49987 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
49990 \begin_layout Description
49992 \begin_inset space ~
49995 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
49996 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
49997 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
49998 code or in the document
50000 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
50002 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
50003 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
50004 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
50005 scanned for the input files.
50006 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
50007 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
50009 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
50010 compilation may fail for some documents.
50013 \begin_layout Section
50017 \begin_layout Standard
50018 Here you can insert your
50027 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
50029 \begin_inset space ~
50033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50035 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
50039 , to mark changes you make as yours.
50042 \begin_layout Section
50044 \begin_inset Index idx
50047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50048 Language ! Settings
50054 \begin_inset Index idx
50057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50058 Settings ! Language
50066 \begin_layout Subsection
50068 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50070 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
50077 \begin_layout Description
50079 \begin_inset space ~
50083 \begin_inset space ~
50086 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
50088 You can find its actual translation status here:
50089 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50091 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
50097 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
50101 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50103 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
50104 LaTeX Language Support
50109 \begin_layout Description
50111 \begin_inset space ~
50114 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
50115 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
50116 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
50117 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
50118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50134 The most widespread language package is
50139 \begin_inset Index idx
50142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50149 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
50151 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
50152 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
50153 come with the alternative
50159 \begin_inset Index idx
50162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50164 packages ! polyglossia
50169 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
50170 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
50176 The available selections are described in section
50177 \begin_inset space ~
50181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50183 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
50190 \begin_layout Description
50192 \begin_inset space ~
50196 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
50197 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
50198 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
50200 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
50204 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
50208 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
50210 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
50214 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
50215 that is used to switch to a different language
50216 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
50217 to start the package
50221 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
50222 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
50226 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
50227 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
50230 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
50234 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
50242 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
50250 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
50253 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
50255 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
50259 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
50277 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50278 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
50285 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
50286 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50291 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
50296 , this setting is ignored.
50301 \begin_layout Description
50303 \begin_inset space ~
50307 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
50314 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
50315 Use this if the language switch set in
50319 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
50323 's alternative command
50327 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
50328 \SpecialChar allowbreak
50331 end{otherlanguage*}
50335 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
50336 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
50337 command toggles the package on and off
50338 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
50339 Empty by default, as
50343 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50345 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
50350 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50356 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
50361 , this setting is ignored.
50366 \begin_layout Description
50368 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
50370 \begin_inset space ~
50374 \begin_inset space ~
50377 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
50381 \begin_layout Description
50383 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
50385 \begin_inset space ~
50389 \begin_inset space ~
50392 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
50398 \begin_layout Description
50400 \begin_inset space ~
50404 \begin_inset space ~
50408 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
50410 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
50413 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
50414 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
50417 to the document class options
50418 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
50419 rather than the language package options.
50420 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
50424 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
50425 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
50427 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
50428 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
50430 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
50435 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
50436 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
50445 \begin_layout Description
50447 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
50449 \begin_inset space ~
50453 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
50455 \begin_inset space ~
50459 \begin_inset space ~
50463 \begin_inset space ~
50469 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
50471 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
50474 this option is set,
50475 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
50476 the language switch defined in
50479 \begin_inset space ~
50484 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
50485 to the document language.
50486 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
50487 This might be needed if you use a non-default
50490 \begin_inset space ~
50495 or if a package resets the document language.
50496 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
50497 usually should be the document language).
50498 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
50499 documents start with the chosen document language.
50500 When this option is not set, the
50503 \begin_inset space ~
50508 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50510 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
50513 \begin_inset space ~
50523 \begin_layout Description
50525 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
50527 \begin_inset space ~
50531 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
50533 \begin_inset space ~
50537 \begin_inset space ~
50541 \begin_inset space ~
50547 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
50551 \begin_inset space ~
50555 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
50556 Set document language explicitly
50562 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
50564 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
50570 \begin_inset space ~
50576 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
50578 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
50582 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
50584 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
50587 the end of the document.
50588 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
50592 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50593 \paragraph_spacing single
50595 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
50601 \begin_layout Description
50603 \begin_inset space ~
50607 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
50609 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
50613 \begin_inset space ~
50617 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
50619 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
50621 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
50625 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
50628 in a language different
50629 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
50631 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
50634 the document language will be
50635 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
50636 marked (by default with a blue
50639 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
50641 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
50645 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
50649 \begin_layout Description
50651 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
50653 \begin_inset space ~
50657 \begin_inset space ~
50661 \begin_inset space ~
50664 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
50665 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
50666 switched via the operating system.
50667 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
50669 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50672 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
50673 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
50678 \begin_layout Description
50680 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
50682 \begin_inset space ~
50686 \begin_inset space ~
50689 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
50690 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
50695 \begin_layout Description
50697 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
50699 \begin_inset space ~
50703 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
50705 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
50709 \begin_inset space ~
50713 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
50714 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
50715 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
50717 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
50721 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
50723 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
50724 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
50726 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
50727 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
50728 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
50730 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
50735 \begin_layout Standard
50740 means that the cursor
50741 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
50742 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
50743 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
50745 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50748 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
50749 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
50753 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
50755 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
50756 specific case always means: move
50760 in text (even if this means:
50766 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
50767 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
50768 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
50769 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
50770 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
50771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50782 \begin_layout Standard
50784 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
50789 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
50790 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
50791 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
50795 ) when coming from the left.
50796 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
50798 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
50799 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
50800 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
50805 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50807 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
50811 \begin_layout Description
50813 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
50815 \begin_inset space ~
50819 \begin_inset space ~
50822 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
50823 separator alignment).
50824 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
50826 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50829 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
50830 (static) custom character here.
50833 \begin_layout Description
50835 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
50837 \begin_inset space ~
50841 \begin_inset space ~
50844 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
50850 \begin_layout Subsection
50854 \begin_layout Standard
50855 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
50856 \begin_inset space ~
50860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50862 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
50869 \begin_layout Section
50873 \begin_layout Subsection
50875 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50877 name "subsec:General-output"
50884 \begin_layout Description
50886 \begin_inset space ~
50889 search Commands that will be used for the menu
50891 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
50893 \begin_inset space ~
50899 For a detailed description see section
50901 Reverse DVI/PDF search
50906 \begin_inset space ~
50914 \begin_layout Description
50916 \begin_inset space ~
50919 Options Options for the program
50923 that is used for the export format
50928 \begin_inset space ~
50932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50934 reference "subsec:Export"
50939 Possible options are listed in the
50944 \begin_inset Newline newline
50948 \begin_inset Flex URL
50951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50953 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
50963 \begin_layout Description
50965 \begin_inset space ~
50969 \begin_inset space ~
50972 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
50975 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50976 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
50978 \begin_inset space ~
50984 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
50987 \begin_layout Description
50989 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
50991 \begin_inset space ~
50995 \begin_inset Index idx
50998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51005 \begin_inset Index idx
51008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51009 Settings ! Date format
51014 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
51015 \begin_inset Newline newline
51019 \begin_inset Flex URL
51022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51024 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
51030 \begin_inset Newline newline
51033 For example the format
51034 \begin_inset Newline newline
51038 \begin_inset Newline newline
51041 prints the date as day/month/year.
51046 \begin_layout Description
51048 \begin_inset space ~
51052 \begin_inset space ~
51055 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
51056 is allowed to overwrite on export.
51059 \begin_layout Subsection
51065 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51067 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
51072 \begin_inset Index idx
51075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51076 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
51085 \begin_layout Description
51087 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
51089 \begin_inset space ~
51097 \begin_inset space ~
51101 \begin_inset space ~
51104 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
51109 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
51130 are used for Cyrillic.
51131 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
51132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51144 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
51146 sets up in the background.
51147 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
51152 \begin_layout Description
51154 \begin_inset space ~
51158 \begin_inset space ~
51162 \begin_inset space ~
51166 \begin_inset space ~
51169 options They only have an effect when the program
51173 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
51176 \begin_layout Standard
51177 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
51178 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
51179 manuals of the applications.
51182 \begin_layout Description
51184 \begin_inset space ~
51187 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
51188 \begin_inset space ~
51192 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51194 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
51201 \begin_layout Description
51203 \begin_inset space ~
51206 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
51207 \begin_inset space ~
51211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51213 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
51220 \begin_layout Description
51222 \begin_inset space ~
51225 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
51226 \begin_inset space ~
51230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51232 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
51239 \begin_layout Description
51245 \begin_inset space ~
51248 command Command for the program
51250 Check\SpecialChar TeX
51253 that is described in the section
51255 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
51260 Additional Features
51265 \begin_layout Standard
51266 There are additionally the following options:
51269 \begin_layout Description
51271 \begin_inset space ~
51275 \begin_inset space ~
51279 \begin_inset space ~
51283 \begin_inset space ~
51288 \begin_inset space ~
51291 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
51292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51309 to separate folders.
51310 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
51312 \begin_inset Index idx
51315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51322 \begin_inset Index idx
51325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51334 \begin_layout Description
51336 \begin_inset space ~
51340 \begin_inset space ~
51344 \begin_inset space ~
51348 \begin_inset space ~
51352 \begin_inset space ~
51356 \begin_inset space ~
51359 changes Removes all manually set
51365 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51366 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51368 \begin_inset space ~
51373 dialog when changing the document class.
51376 \begin_layout Section
51378 \begin_inset space ~
51382 \begin_inset Index idx
51385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51394 \begin_layout Subsection
51396 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51398 name "subsec:Converters"
51403 \begin_inset Index idx
51406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51415 \begin_layout Standard
51416 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
51417 from one format to another.
51418 You can modify converters or create new ones.
51419 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
51426 \begin_inset space ~
51431 field and press the
51436 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
51440 \begin_inset space ~
51445 drop-down list, modify the
51449 field and press the
51456 \begin_layout Standard
51459 Converter File Cache
51465 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
51467 Maximum Age (in days
51470 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
51471 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
51474 \begin_layout Standard
51475 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
51476 definition, is described in the section
51487 \begin_layout Subsection
51489 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51491 name "sec:File-Formats"
51496 \begin_inset Index idx
51499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51506 \begin_inset Index idx
51509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51518 \begin_layout Standard
51519 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
51529 programs that should be used for certain formats.
51532 \begin_layout Standard
51533 You can also define the
51535 Default output format
51537 that is used when you use
51539 View, Update, View Master Document
51543 Update Master Document
51549 menu or the toolbar.
51552 \begin_layout Standard
51553 More about formats and their options is described in the section
51564 \begin_layout Standard
51565 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
51567 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
51568 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
51569 This is done by specifying a
51574 More about this is described in the section
51585 \begin_layout Chapter
51586 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
51588 \begin_inset Index idx
51591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51598 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51600 name "chap:Units-available-in"
51607 \begin_layout Standard
51609 \begin_inset space ~
51613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51615 reference "tab:Units"
51619 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
51620 and used in this documentation.
51623 \begin_layout Standard
51624 \begin_inset Float table
51631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51632 \begin_inset Caption Standard
51634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51635 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51650 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
51656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51658 \begin_inset Tabular
51659 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
51660 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
51661 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51662 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
51663 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51709 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51713 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51746 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51750 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51812 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51816 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
51820 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51977 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51981 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52014 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52018 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52051 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52055 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52087 scaled point (65536
52088 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52092 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52155 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
52160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52279 % of original image width
52284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52368 \begin_layout Standard
52369 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
52372 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
52379 \begin_layout Bibliography
52380 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52381 LatexCommand bibitem
52388 The \SpecialChar LyX
52390 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52393 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
52399 \begin_inset Newline newline
52403 \begin_inset Flex URL
52406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52408 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
52416 \begin_layout Bibliography
52417 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52418 LatexCommand bibitem
52419 key "latexcompanion"
52424 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
52426 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
52427 Companion Second Edition.
52430 Addison-Wesley, 2004
52433 \begin_layout Bibliography
52434 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52435 LatexCommand bibitem
52441 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
52444 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
52448 Addison-Wesley, 2003
52451 \begin_layout Bibliography
52452 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52453 LatexCommand bibitem
52462 : A Document Preparation System.
52465 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
52468 \begin_layout Bibliography
52469 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52470 LatexCommand bibitem
52480 The \SpecialChar TeX
52484 Addison-Wesley, 1984
52487 \begin_layout Bibliography
52488 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52489 LatexCommand bibitem
52495 The \SpecialChar TeX
52497 \begin_inset Newline newline
52501 \begin_inset Flex URL
52504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52506 https://ctan.org/topic
52514 \begin_layout Bibliography
52515 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52516 LatexCommand bibitem
52522 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
52524 \begin_inset Newline newline
52528 \begin_inset Flex URL
52531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52533 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
52541 \begin_layout Bibliography
52542 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52543 LatexCommand bibitem
52550 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52552 name "Documentation"
52553 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
52560 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52564 \begin_inset Newline newline
52568 \begin_inset Flex URL
52571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52573 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
52581 \begin_layout Bibliography
52582 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52583 LatexCommand bibitem
52590 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52592 name "Documentation"
52593 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
52598 how to use the program
52600 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52604 \begin_inset Newline newline
52608 \begin_inset Flex URL
52611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52613 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
52621 \begin_layout Bibliography
52622 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52623 LatexCommand bibitem
52630 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52632 name "Documentation"
52633 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
52638 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52644 \begin_inset Index idx
52647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52649 packages ! biblatex
52655 \begin_inset Newline newline
52659 \begin_inset Flex URL
52662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52664 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
52672 \begin_layout Bibliography
52673 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52674 LatexCommand bibitem
52681 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52683 name "Documentation"
52684 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
52689 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52695 \begin_inset Index idx
52698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52706 \begin_inset Newline newline
52710 \begin_inset Flex URL
52713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52715 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
52723 \begin_layout Bibliography
52724 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52725 LatexCommand bibitem
52732 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52734 name "Documentation"
52735 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
52745 \begin_inset Newline newline
52749 \begin_inset Flex URL
52752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52754 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
52762 \begin_layout Bibliography
52763 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52764 LatexCommand bibitem
52765 key "makeindex-man"
52771 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52774 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
52784 \begin_inset Newline newline
52788 \begin_inset Flex URL
52791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52793 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
52801 \begin_layout Bibliography
52802 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52803 LatexCommand bibitem
52810 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52812 name "Documentation"
52813 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
52823 \begin_inset Newline newline
52827 \begin_inset Flex URL
52830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52832 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
52840 \begin_layout Bibliography
52841 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52842 LatexCommand bibitem
52849 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52851 name "Documentation"
52852 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
52857 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
52859 \begin_inset Newline newline
52863 \begin_inset Flex URL
52866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52868 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
52876 \begin_layout Bibliography
52877 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52878 LatexCommand bibitem
52885 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52887 name "Documentation"
52888 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
52893 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52899 \begin_inset Index idx
52902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52910 \begin_inset Newline newline
52914 \begin_inset Flex URL
52917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52919 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
52927 \begin_layout Bibliography
52928 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52929 LatexCommand bibitem
52936 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52938 name "Documentation"
52939 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
52944 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52950 \begin_inset Index idx
52953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52955 packages ! enumitem
52961 \begin_inset Newline newline
52965 \begin_inset Flex URL
52968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52970 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
52978 \begin_layout Bibliography
52979 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52980 LatexCommand bibitem
52987 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52989 name "Documentation"
52990 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
52995 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53001 \begin_inset Index idx
53004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53006 packages ! fancyhdr
53012 \begin_inset Newline newline
53016 \begin_inset Flex URL
53019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53021 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
53029 \begin_layout Bibliography
53030 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53031 LatexCommand bibitem
53038 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53040 name "Documentation"
53041 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
53046 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53052 \begin_inset Index idx
53055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53057 packages ! hyperref
53063 \begin_inset Newline newline
53067 \begin_inset Flex URL
53070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53072 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
53080 \begin_layout Bibliography
53081 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53082 LatexCommand bibitem
53089 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53091 name "Documentation"
53092 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
53097 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53103 \begin_inset Index idx
53106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53108 packages ! microtype
53114 \begin_inset Newline newline
53118 \begin_inset Flex URL
53121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53123 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
53131 \begin_layout Bibliography
53132 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53133 LatexCommand bibitem
53140 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53142 name "Documentation"
53143 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
53148 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53154 \begin_inset Index idx
53157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53165 \begin_inset Newline newline
53169 \begin_inset Flex URL
53172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53174 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
53182 \begin_layout Bibliography
53183 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53184 LatexCommand bibitem
53191 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53193 name "Documentation"
53194 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
53199 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53205 \begin_inset Index idx
53208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53210 packages ! prettyref
53216 \begin_inset Newline newline
53220 \begin_inset Flex URL
53223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53225 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
53233 \begin_layout Bibliography
53234 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53235 LatexCommand bibitem
53242 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53244 name "Documentation"
53245 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
53250 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53256 \begin_inset Index idx
53259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53261 packages ! refstyle
53267 \begin_inset Newline newline
53271 \begin_inset Flex URL
53274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53276 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
53284 \begin_layout Bibliography
53285 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53286 LatexCommand bibitem
53293 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53296 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
53301 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53303 \begin_inset Newline newline
53307 \begin_inset Flex URL
53310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53312 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
53320 \begin_layout Bibliography
53321 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53322 LatexCommand bibitem
53329 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53332 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
53337 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53339 \begin_inset Newline newline
53343 \begin_inset Flex URL
53346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53348 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
53356 \begin_layout Bibliography
53357 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53358 LatexCommand bibitem
53365 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53368 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
53373 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53374 for Cyrillic languages:
53375 \begin_inset Newline newline
53379 \begin_inset Flex URL
53382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53384 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
53392 \begin_layout Bibliography
53393 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53394 LatexCommand bibitem
53401 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53404 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
53409 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53411 \begin_inset Newline newline
53415 \begin_inset Flex URL
53418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53420 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
53428 \begin_layout Bibliography
53429 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53430 LatexCommand bibitem
53437 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53440 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
53445 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53447 \begin_inset Newline newline
53451 \begin_inset Flex URL
53454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53456 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
53464 \begin_layout Bibliography
53465 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53466 LatexCommand bibitem
53473 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53476 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
53481 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53483 \begin_inset Newline newline
53487 \begin_inset Flex URL
53490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53492 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
53500 \begin_layout Standard
53501 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
53508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53535 \begin_inset Note Note
53538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53545 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
53546 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
53547 bibliography is the second one:
53555 \begin_layout Standard
53556 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
53557 LatexCommand bibtex
53558 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
53559 options "biblio/alphadin"
53566 \begin_layout Standard
53567 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53571 \begin_layout Standard
53575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53581 pagedeclaration}[1]{
53584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53590 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
53598 \begin_inset Note Note
53601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53602 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
53603 \begin_inset space ~
53607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53609 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
53621 \begin_layout Standard
53622 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
53623 LatexCommand printnomenclature
53629 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
53630 LatexCommand printindex